Psion 7515CA EP10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual EP10 Hand Held Computer with Windows Embedded

Psion Inc EP10 Hand-Held Computer EP10 Hand Held Computer with Windows Embedded

user manual

ISO 9001 CertifiedQuality Management SystemEP10 Hand-Held Computer(Model Number 7515)Windows Embedded 6.5User ManualApril 5, 2011 Part No. 8000227.A
© Copyright 2011 by Psion Inc., Mississauga, Ontario2100 Meadowvale Boulevard, Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L5N 7J9http:\\www.psionteklogix.comThis document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Inc., is issued in strictconfidence, and is not to be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, except for the solepurpose of promoting the sale of Psion manufactured goods and services. Furthermore, thisdocument is not to be used as a basis for design, manufacture, or sub-contract, or in anymanner detrimental to the interests of Psion Teklogix Inc.DisclaimerEvery effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-date. In ad-dition, changes are periodically added to the information herein; these changes will be in-corporated into new editions of the publication. Psion Inc. reserves the right to makeimprovements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this doc-ument without notice, and shall not be responsible for any damages, including but notlimited to consequential damages, caused by reliance on the material presented, includingbut not limited to typographical errors.Psion, Psion Teklogix, and EP10 are trademarks of Psion Inc.Windows® and the Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Psion Inc. is under license.All trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective holders.This user manual supports Model Numbers:• 7515U with FCC ID: GM37515UA and IC: 2739D-7515UA• 7515C with FCC ID: GM37515CA
TABLE OF CONTENTSEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual iChapter 1:  Introduction1.1 About This Manual......................................................................31.2 Text Conventions........................................................................41.3 EP10 Hand-Held Features ...............................................................41.3.1 The EP10 Hand-Held............................................................6Chapter 2:  Getting to Know the EP102.1 Features of the EP10 Hand-Held........................................................112.2 The Battery.............................................................................122.2.1 Battery Safety..................................................................132.2.2 Removing the Battery Pack.....................................................132.2.3 Battery Swap Time.............................................................132.2.4 Charging the Battery ...........................................................132.3 The Keyboard ..........................................................................152.3.1 EP10 QWERTY Keyboard .....................................................152.3.2 Locking the Keyboard..........................................................162.3.3 Modifier Keys..................................................................162.3.4 The Keys.......................................................................172.3.5 The Keypad Backlight..........................................................192.4 The Display.............................................................................192.4.1 Setting the Backlight Intensity & Duration......................................192.4.2 Adjusting the Backlight using the Keyboard . . ..................................192.4.3 Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen.........................................202.4.4 Screen Orientation..............................................................212.5 EP10 Indicators.........................................................................212.5.1 LEDs...........................................................................212.6 Audio Indicators........................................................................222.6.1 Adjusting Speaker Volume.....................................................222.7 Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time......................................232.7.1 Storing Batteries................................................................232.8 Uploading Data in a Docking Station ...................................................242.9 Bluetooth Radio ........................................................................24Preliminary Draft
Contentsii EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual2.9.1 Pairing a Bluetooth Headset  ...................................................252.10 Inserting the microSD and SIM Card ...................................................252.10.1 Inserting the Cards .............................................................262.11 The Camera ............................................................................262.12 General Maintenance ...................................................................262.12.1 Caring for the Touchscreen.....................................................262.12.2 Cleaning the EP10..............................................................27Chapter 3:  Using Windows Embedded 6.53.1 Navigating in Windows Embedded 6.5 and Applications................................313.1.1 Navigating using a Touchscreen and Stylus.....................................313.2 Windows Embedded 6.5 Desktop – Today Screen.......................................313.2.1 Windows Embedded 6.5 Navigation Bar .......................................323.2.2 Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm ................................................343.2.3 Ownership Information.........................................................363.2.4 E-mail Notification.............................................................373.2.5 Task Notification...............................................................373.2.6 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments . . ........................................403.3 Start Menu..............................................................................433.3.1 Customising the Start Menu....................................................433.4 Managing Files and Folders.............................................................443.4.1 Creating a New Folder .........................................................453.4.2 Renaming a File................................................................453.4.3 Copying a File..................................................................453.4.4 Deleting a File..................................................................463.5 Using Menus ...........................................................................463.5.1 Pop-Up Menus.................................................................463.6 The Softkey Bar ........................................................................473.7 Programs – Using Applications.........................................................493.8 Settings.................................................................................503.9 Help....................................................................................513.10 Entering Text ...........................................................................523.10.1 Soft Keyboard..................................................................523.10.2 The Transcriber ................................................................533.10.3 Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer .......................................54Chapter 4:  Programs4.1 Programs ...............................................................................59Preliminary Draft
ContentsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual iii4.2 Games..................................................................................594.3 ActiveSync® ...........................................................................594.3.1 Synchronization................................................................594.4 Calculator ..............................................................................604.5 Demo Scanner..........................................................................604.6 Office Mobile...........................................................................604.6.1 Excel Mobile...................................................................604.6.2 OneNote Mobile ...............................................................614.6.3 Word Mobile...................................................................674.6.4 PowerPoint Mobile.............................................................684.7 File Explorer............................................................................694.8 Getting Started..........................................................................694.9 PTSI Imager Demo.....................................................................694.10 Internet Sharing.........................................................................704.10.1 Creating an Internet Connection................................................704.10.2 Using Internet Sharing..........................................................704.11 Notes...................................................................................714.11.1 Creating a Note.................................................................714.11.2 Converting Handwritten Notes to Text. . ........................................724.11.3 Renaming a Note...............................................................744.11.4 Recording Notes ...............................................................744.11.5 Synchronizing a Note...........................................................754.12 Pictures & Videos.......................................................................754.12.1 Using the Camera ..............................................................754.12.2 Moving Photos to the EP10.....................................................774.12.3 Opening a Photo................................................................774.12.4 Deleting a Photo................................................................784.12.5 Editing a Photo.................................................................784.12.6 Creating a Slide Show..........................................................784.12.7 Using the Video Recorder......................................................794.13 Remote Desktop Mobile................................................................804.13.1 Connecting to a Terminal Server ...............................................814.13.2 Disconnecting without Ending a Session........................................814.13.3 Ending a Session ...............................................................814.14 Search..................................................................................824.15 Task Manager...........................................................................824.16 Tasks ...................................................................................82Preliminary Draft
Contentsiv EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual4.17 Internet Explorer........................................................................824.17.1 Browsing Web Sites............................................................834.18 Messaging..............................................................................844.18.1 Folders.........................................................................844.18.2 Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook ............................................844.18.3 Changing Synchronization Settings.............................................864.19 Windows Media........................................................................87Chapter 5:  Settings5.1 Settings.................................................................................955.2 Personal Settings .......................................................................955.3 App Launch Keys.......................................................................955.4 Buttons Icon............................................................................985.4.1 Up/Down Control..............................................................985.4.2 Sequence ......................................................................995.4.3 One Shots......................................................................995.4.4 Keyboard Macro Keys ........................................................1015.4.5 Unicode Mapping.............................................................1025.4.6 Scancode Remapping..........................................................1035.4.7 Lock Sequence................................................................1065.5 Input...................................................................................1075.5.1 Input Method Tab . . ...........................................................1085.5.2 Options–Additional Choices...................................................1125.6 Lock...................................................................................1135.7 Menus.................................................................................1145.7.1 Start Menu Tab................................................................1145.8 Owner Information ....................................................................1155.9 Phone .................................................................................1165.10 Sound & Notifications .................................................................1165.10.1 Sounds ........................................................................1175.10.2 Notifications ..................................................................1175.11 Today Screen ..........................................................................1185.11.1 Appearance ...................................................................1185.11.2 Items..........................................................................1185.12 System Tab Settings ...................................................................1195.13 About. . . ...............................................................................1195.14 About Device . .........................................................................120Preliminary Draft
ContentsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual v5.15 Backlight..............................................................................1205.15.1 Battery Power.................................................................1205.15.2 External Power................................................................1215.15.3 Intensity.......................................................................1215.16 Certificates ............................................................................1225.16.1 Choosing a Certificate.........................................................1245.17 Clock & Alarms .......................................................................1245.18 Customer Feedback....................................................................1245.19 Encryption.............................................................................1255.20 Error Reporting........................................................................1265.21 GPS (Global Positioning System)......................................................1275.22 GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings.............................................1285.23 Manage Triggers.......................................................................1335.23.1 Trigger Mappings .............................................................1345.24 Managed Programs ....................................................................1375.25 Memory ...............................................................................1375.25.1 Main Tab......................................................................1385.25.2 Storage Card ..................................................................1385.26 Power Icon ............................................................................1385.26.1 Battery Tab....................................................................1395.26.2 Advanced Tab.................................................................1395.26.3 Battery Details ................................................................1405.26.4 Built-In Devices...............................................................1415.26.5  Card Slots ....................................................................1415.26.6 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup.............................1425.26.7 Suspend Mode ................................................................1435.27 Regional Settings......................................................................1435.28 Remove Programs.....................................................................1445.29 Screen Icon............................................................................1445.30 Task Manager..........................................................................1455.31 Teklogix Error Handling Service.......................................................1475.31.1 ErrorLogInfo..................................................................1475.31.2 NetLog........................................................................1485.32 Teklogix Imagers Settings .............................................................1495.33 Scanner Settings.......................................................................1505.33.1 Bar Code Settings – The Scanner Menu .......................................1515.33.2 Options Tab...................................................................152Preliminary Draft
Contentsvi EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.33.3 Translations Tab ..............................................................1545.33.4 Ports Tab......................................................................1575.34 Total Recall. . . .........................................................................1605.34.1 Creating a Backup Profile .....................................................1615.34.2 Restoring a Profile ............................................................1645.35 TweakIT...............................................................................1645.35.1 Advanced Interface And Network .............................................1655.35.2 Advanced Services Settings ...................................................1665.35.3 Radio Features ................................................................1675.35.4 User System Setting...........................................................1685.35.5 Registry Editor................................................................1695.36 Windows Update ......................................................................1695.37 Connections Tab.......................................................................1695.37.1 Navigation Bar Hotkeys.......................................................1705.38 Beam..................................................................................1725.39 Bluetooth Setup........................................................................1725.39.1 The Devices Tab ..............................................................1735.39.2 Bluetooth Mode...............................................................1765.39.3 Bluetooth COM Ports.........................................................1775.39.4 Outgoing Port .................................................................1785.39.5 Services.......................................................................1785.39.6 Active Connections............................................................1795.39.7 About Tab. . . ..................................................................1805.39.8 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone...................................................1805.40 Connection Properties .................................................................1825.40.1 Port Settings...................................................................1835.40.2 Call Options...................................................................1845.41 Connections – Connecting to the Internet ..............................................1845.41.1 Modem Connection Setup.....................................................1855.42 Wireless Manager Icon ................................................................1895.42.1 Flight Mode – Disabling Wireless Components................................1895.42.2 Setting Up a Network Card....................................................1905.42.3 Network Adaptor Cards .......................................................1905.42.4 Changing Network Card Settings..............................................1925.42.5 VPN Connection Setup........................................................1925.42.6 Managing an Existing Connection.............................................1935.42.7 Selecting a Network...........................................................1945.42.8 Proxy Server Setup . ...........................................................195Preliminary Draft
ContentsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual vii5.43 Wireless Statistics......................................................................1975.44 Wireless WAN  ........................................................................1975.44.1 Softkey Bar Icons .............................................................1975.44.2 Establishing a Connection.....................................................1985.44.3 Disconnecting from a Network................................................1995.44.4 Advanced Information.........................................................1995.44.5 Tools Menu ...................................................................2015.44.6 SMS Menu....................................................................2095.45 Windows Update ......................................................................213Chapter 6:  Peripheral Devices & Accessories6.1 Carrying Accessories ..................................................................2196.1.1 The Hand Strap with Tether – Model No. RV6021 ............................2196.1.2 Attaching the Tether – Model No. RV6020 . . . .................................2216.1.3 Carrying Pouch................................................................2226.2 The Battery............................................................................2226.3 Adaptor Cable Options ................................................................2236.4 Chargers and Docking Stations.........................................................2236.4.1 Important Safety Instructions..................................................2236.4.2 Installation: Chargers and Docking Stations ...................................2246.4.3 Power Consumption Considerations...........................................2256.5 Desktop Docking Station – Model No. RV4000........................................2256.5.1 Operator Controls .............................................................2266.5.2 Indicators .....................................................................2266.5.3 Operation .....................................................................2266.5.4 Cleaning the RV4000 .........................................................2286.5.5 Troubleshooting . . . ...........................................................2296.6 Quad Docking Station – Model No. RV4004...........................................2306.6.1 Operator Controls .............................................................2306.6.2 Indicators .....................................................................2306.6.3 Quad Dock Operation .........................................................2316.6.4 Cleaning the RV4004 .........................................................2326.6.5 Troubleshooting ...............................................................2336.7 Quad Charger – Model No. RV3004 ...................................................2336.7.1 Charging the EP10 Battery ....................................................2336.7.2 Installation ....................................................................2336.7.3 Operator Controls .............................................................2346.7.4 Charge Indicators..............................................................234Preliminary Draft
Contentsviii EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual6.7.5 Charging Batteries.............................................................2356.7.6 Troubleshooting...............................................................2356.8 Snap Modules .........................................................................2366.9 AC Wall Adaptor – Model No. PS1050-G1 ............................................2376.10 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor – Model No. RV3050...................................2376.11 The Non-Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1000...............................2386.11.1 Important Instructions.........................................................2396.11.2 Vehicle Cradle Operation......................................................2396.11.3 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations ..................................2406.11.4 Cleaning the RV1000 Vehicle Cradle. . . .......................................2426.12 The Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1005 . . . .................................2426.12.1 RV1005 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations .........................2446.12.2 Cable Arrangement............................................................2456.12.3 Electrical Requirements.......................................................2456.12.4 USB and Serial Connections...................................................2476.12.5 Using the Vehicle Cradle......................................................2486.12.6 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle................................................2486.13 EA11 Imager ..........................................................................2496.13.1 Operating Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers ....................................2496.14 Bluetooth Peripherals..................................................................2506.15 Digital Camera ........................................................................251Chapter 7:  Specifications7.1  EP10 Specifications – Model No. 7515................................................2557.1.1 Hardware......................................................................2557.1.2 Software ......................................................................2567.1.3 Wireless Communication......................................................2567.1.4 Power Management ...........................................................2577.1.5 Expansion Slot................................................................2577.1.6 Bar Code Application .........................................................2577.1.7 Digital Camera................................................................2577.1.8 Voice Over IP (VOIP).........................................................2577.1.9  Accessories...................................................................2577.1.10 Approvals.....................................................................2587.1.11 Environmental Specifications..................................................2587.2 Radio Specifications...................................................................2597.2.1 Murata 802.11 a/b/g/n Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Radio...............2597.2.2 Murata Bluetooth Radio.......................................................260Preliminary Draft
ContentsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual ix7.2.3 Sierra Wireless MC5728V.....................................................2617.2.4 Cinterion PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio .....................................2637.3 Lithium-Ion 3600 mAh Battery Specifications . . .......................................2657.4 Internal Imager ........................................................................2677.4.1 EA11 Decoded 2D Imager ....................................................267Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) A.1 Wireless WAN........................................................................ A-1A.1.1 Taskbar Icons ................................................................ A-1A.1.2 Establishing a Connection.................................................... A-2A.1.3 Advanced Information........................................................ A-4A.1.4 Tools Menu .................................................................. A-6A.1.5 SMS Menu..................................................................A-15A.1.6 Voice........................................................................A-16A.2 Power Mode.........................................................................A-17Appendix B: Port Pinouts B.1  Dock Port Pinout......................................................................B-1B.2 Battery Contact Pinout.................................................................B-2Appendix C:  Bar Codes SettingsC.1 Scanner Menu .........................................................................C-1C.2 Decoded (Internal) Scanner............................................................C-2C.2.1 Options – Decoded (Internal) Scanner.........................................C-2C.2.2 Advanced Options – Decoded (Internal).......................................C-3C.2.3 Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options......................................C-5C.2.4 Data Options — Decoded (Internal) Scanner ..................................C-5C.2.5 Code 39.......................................................................C-6C.2.6 Code 128......................................................................C-9C.2.7 EAN 13 ..................................................................... C-10C.2.8 EAN 8 ...................................................................... C-10C.2.9 UPC A ...................................................................... C-11C.2.10  UPC E...................................................................... C-11C.2.11  UPC/EAN Shared Settings.................................................. C-12C.2.12  Code 93 .................................................................... C-13C.2.13  Codabar .................................................................... C-14C.2.14  MSI Plessey ................................................................ C-14C.2.15  Interleaved 2 of 5........................................................... C-16C.2.16  Discrete 2 of 5.............................................................. C-16Preliminary Draft
xEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualC.2.17  RSS Code .................................................................. C-17C.2.18  Composite.................................................................. C-18C.2.19  PDF-417.................................................................... C-18C.2.20  Micro PDF-417............................................................. C-19C.3 Decoded............................................................................. C-20C.3.1 Options – Decoded Scanner ................................................. C-20C.3.2 Advanced Options – Decoded Scanner ...................................... C-20C.3.3 Code 39..................................................................... C-21C.3.4 Code 128.................................................................... C-23C.3.5 EAN 13 ..................................................................... C-24C.3.6 EAN 8 ...................................................................... C-25C.3.7 UPCA....................................................................... C-25C.3.8 UPC E ...................................................................... C-26C.3.9 UPC/EAN Shared  .......................................................... C-26C.3.10  Code 93 .................................................................... C-27C.3.11  Codabar .................................................................... C-28C.3.12  MSI Plessey ................................................................ C-29C.3.13  Code 11 .................................................................... C-30C.3.14  Interleaved 2 of 5........................................................... C-30C.3.15  Matrix 2 of 5................................................................ C-31C.3.16  Discrete 2 of 5.............................................................. C-32C.3.17  Telepen..................................................................... C-32C.3.18  RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology) .................................... C-33C.3.19  Composite.................................................................. C-34C.3.20  TLC-39..................................................................... C-34C.3.21  PDF-417.................................................................... C-35C.3.22  Micro PDF-417............................................................. C-35C.3.23  Codablock.................................................................. C-36C.4 Imager............................................................................... C-37C.4.1 Options – Imager............................................................ C-37C.4.2 Code 39 Settings ............................................................ C-38C.4.3 Code 128 Settings ........................................................... C-38C.4.4 EAN 13 ..................................................................... C-38C.4.5 EAN 8 ...................................................................... C-39C.4.6 UPC A ...................................................................... C-39C.4.7 UPC E ...................................................................... C-40C.4.8 Code 93..................................................................... C-40C.4.9  Codabar .................................................................... C-40C.4.10  Interleaved 2 of 5........................................................... C-40Preliminary Draft
ContentsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual xiC.4.11  RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology) .................................... C-41C.4.12  Composite.................................................................. C-41C.4.13  PDF-417.................................................................... C-41C.4.14  Micro PDF-417............................................................. C-42C.4.15  2D Data Matrix............................................................. C-42C.4.16  2D QR Code................................................................ C-43C.4.17  2D Maxicode............................................................... C-43C.4.18  2D Aztec ................................................................... C-43C.4.19  Postal: PlaNET ............................................................. C-44C.4.20  Postal: PostNET............................................................ C-44C.4.21  Postal: Australian........................................................... C-44C.4.22  Postal: Japanese ............................................................ C-44C.4.23  Postal: Korean.............................................................. C-45C.4.24  Postal: Royal ............................................................... C-45C.4.25  Postal: Kix.................................................................. C-45C.4.26  Postal: Canadian............................................................ C-46Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletD.1 Required Applets ..................................................................... D-1D.2 Presets ............................................................................... D-1D.2.1 Predefined Presets............................................................ D-2D.2.2 Bar Code Predefined Presets.................................................. D-2D.2.3 Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets............................... D-3D.2.4 Image Capture Predefined Presets ............................................ D-4D.3 Using The Teklogix Imagers Applet .................................................. D-4D.3.1 Configuring The Image Capture Presets ...................................... D-4D.3.2 Selecting A Camera.......................................................... D-5D.3.3 Setting The Active Preset..................................................... D-5D.3.4 Viewing A Preset............................................................. D-6D.3.5 Creating A Custom Preset.................................................... D-6D.3.6 Modifying A Custom Preset.................................................. D-7D.3.7 Removing A Custom Preset .................................................. D-9D.4 Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets................................. D-9D.4.1 Selecting A Camera.........................................................D-10D.4.2 Setting The Active Preset....................................................D-10D.4.3 Viewing A Preset............................................................D-10D.4.4 Creating A Custom Preset...................................................D-11D.4.5 Modifying A Custom Preset.................................................D-12D.4.6 Removing A Custom Preset ................................................. D-13Preliminary Draft
Contentsxii EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualD.4.7 Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Symbologies.......................... D-13D.4.8 Setting The Active Preset....................................................D-14D.4.9 Viewing A Preset............................................................ D-14D.4.10 Creating A Custom Preset................................................... D-15D.4.11 Modifying A Custom Preset................................................. D-16D.4.12 Removing A Custom Preset .................................................D-17D.4.13 Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers Applet...................D-17D.4.14 Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code Data.................................... D-18D.4.15 Translation Tab – Configuring Rules ........................................ D-20D.4.16 Advanced Tab............................................................... D-20D.5 Teklogix Scanners Applet............................................................ D-22Preliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1INTRODUCTION 11.1 About This Manual ....................................31.2 Text Conventions .....................................41.3 EP10 Hand-Held Features................................41.3.1 The EP10 Hand-Held..............................6Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 1: IntroductionAbout This ManualEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 31.1 About This ManualThis manual describes how to configure, operate and maintain the EP10 Hand-Held Com-puter (Model Number 7515).Chapter 1: Introductionprovides a basic overview of the EP10 Hand-Held.Chapter 2: Basic Checkoutdescribes the steps required to get the EP10 ready for operationChapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10describes the features and outlines how to charge and maintain the battery. This chapter also provides information about indicators, microSD and SIM card installation along with general EP10 maintenance.Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5describes the Microsoft® Windows Embedded 6.5 Today screen and how to use it. This chapter also outlines basics like moving around a window, displaying menus, and so on.Chapter 4: Programsprovides a description of the Windows Embedded 6.5 Programs options and how to use them.Chapter 5: Settingsprovides details about Windows Embedded 6.5 Settings options and how to use them.Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessoriesdescribes the peripherals and accessories available for your EP10.Chapter 7: Specificationsdetails radio, imager and battery specifications.Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)provides details about Wireless WAN radio.Appendix B: Port Pinoutsdescribes port pinouts.Appendix C: Bar Codes Settingsdescribes the bar codes supported by the imager available for the EP10. Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Appletdescribes the Teklogix Imagers applet and outlines how to use it.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 1: IntroductionTex t  C o n v e n t i o n s4EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual1.2 Text Conventions1.3 EP10 Hand-Held FeaturesThe EP10 is a personal digital assistant operates with the Windows Embedded 6.5 operating system with a phone option. This EP10 is intended for use in commercial and light industrial applications with a focus on real time wireless data transactions. All possible bar code input methodologies are supported by one of a variety of scanners available. Optimization for spe-cific operational environments is supported with a wide range of peripheral options and carrying accessories.Model• EP10 Hand-Held – Model Number 7515Platform• AM3715 Processor• 800 MHz (ARM Cortex A8)• On-board RAM: 256 MB SDRAM• On-board ROM: 2 GB FlashOperating System• Microsoft Windows Embedded 6.5Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information.Important: These statements provide particularly important instructions or addi-tional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment.Warning: These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury, equipment damage or data loss.Important: For all safety, regulatory and warranty information, refer to the ‘EP10 Hand-Held Regulatory & Warranty Guide’, PN 8000235.For a complete list of EP10 Hand-Held features, physical attributes and approvals, refer to Chapter 7,“Specifications”.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 1: IntroductionEP10 Hand-Held FeaturesEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 5User Interface•Display (Backlit)- 3.7 in. VGA portrait mode- Backlight feature 165 cd/m2 output- Sunlight readable with integrated touchscreen- Colour 480 x 640 graphic TFT- Passive stylus or finger operation•Audio- Built-in 85db mono speaker- microphone- receiver•Keyboard (Backlit)-QWERTY- High reliability keypad ultra-white backlight- Ergonomically enhanced for ambidextrous one-hand operation•Camera- 3.2 Mega Pixel Colour- Auto Focus- Dual LED Flash- Video capture capabilityWireless Communication• On-board IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n• Bluetooth v2.1 radio (CCX V4 Certified)• UMTS 3.5G HSPA + CDMA EV-DO Rev A radio options• Integrated 5 band Antenna, supports both voice and data• SiRF starIV GPSNote: 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth are available simultaneously.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 1: IntroductionThe EP10 Hand-Held6EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualEnhanced Features• Accelerometer• Digital Compass• Gyroscope• Light Sensor• Proximity SensorExpansion Slot• One microSD slotVOIP (Voice Over IP)• Push-to-talk1.3.1 The EP10 Hand-HeldFigure 1.1  EP10 Hand-Held – QWERTYPreliminary Draft
Chapter 1: IntroductionThe EP10 Hand-HeldEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 7Figure 1.2  Phone KeysKeyEndKeySendNote: Refer to “Sending & Ending Phone Calls using the Phone Keypad” on page 33 for details about these keys.Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 9GETTING TO KNOW THE EP10 22.1 Features of the EP10 Hand-Held............................112.2 The Battery.......................................122.2.1 Battery Safety ................................132.2.2 Removing the Battery Pack .........................132.2.3 Battery Swap Time..............................132.2.4 Charging the Battery.............................132.2.4.1 Chargers and Docking Stations...................142.3 The Keyboard......................................152.3.1 EP10 QWERTY Keyboard. .........................152.3.2 Locking the Keyboard............................162.3.3 Modifier Keys ................................162.3.3.1 Activating Modifier Keys & the Shift-State Indicator.......162.3.3.2 Locking Modifier Keys.......................172.3.4 The Keys...................................172.3.5 The Keypad Backlight............................192.4 The Display.......................................192.4.1 Setting the Backlight Intensity & Duration .................192.4.2 Adjusting the Backlight using the Keyboard.................192.4.3 Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen...................202.4.4 Screen Orientation..............................212.5 EP10 Indicators.....................................212.5.1 LEDs.....................................212.6 Audio Indicators....................................222.7 Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time..................232.7.1 Storing Batteries...............................232.8 Uploading Data in a Docking Station .........................242.9 Bluetooth Radio ....................................242.9.1 Pairing a Bluetooth Headset.........................252.10 Inserting the microSD and SIM Card.........................25Preliminary Draft
10 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual2.10.1 Inserting the Cards..............................262.11 The Camera ......................................262.12 General Maintenance..................................262.12.1 Caring for the Touchscreen .........................262.12.2 Cleaning the EP10..............................27Preliminary Draft
2.1 Features of the EP10 Hand-HeldReceiver3 Light Emitting DiodesRIGHT SIDEEnter ButtonVertical Scroll LEFT SIDEScan ButtonVolume ButtonTOPScanner/ImagerButtonMicrophone Light Sensor (LEDs)Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10The Battery12 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualFigure 2.1  Back of EP10Figure 2.2  Ports2.2 The BatteryThe EP10 operates with a 3600 mAh, Lithium-Ion battery pack, Model No. RV3010.Preparing the EP10 for operation requires that a battery pack be charged and installed in the EP10.SpeakerHand StrapBattery LatchStylusCameraBattery &AnchorSIM/microSD CardCompartmentsFlashDocking Port/USB On-The-GoHand StrapAnchorPreliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10Battery SafetyEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 132.2.1 Battery Safety2.2.2 Removing the Battery PackRefer to “Preparing the EP10 for Operation” on page 13 for more details about removing and installing the battery.2.2.3 Battery Swap TimeAssuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been al-tered, battery swap time is approximately 5 minutes – you will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame.To protect data, the safest place to store data is on a microSD memory card or externally to the device on a USB memory stick or on a PC.The Suspend Threshold feature allows you to determine the battery capacity at which the EP10 will be shut down. If left at the default value, Maximum Operating Time, the EP10 will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time. If you choose Maximum Backup Time, the EP10 shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time.(Refer to “Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup” on page 142 for details about reserving battery power for data backup purposes.) 2.2.4 Charging the BatteryBatteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. They must be fully charged prior to use. Important: Before attempting to install, use or charge the battery pack, it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the quick refer-ence guide entitled ‘EP10 Hand-Held Regulatory & Warranty Guide’, PN 8000235.Important: Always shut down the EP10 before removing the battery. To safely remove the battery, press and hold down the Power button until the ‘Shutdown’ screen is displayed. Choose ‘Shutdown’ and tap on OK.Keep in mind also that all EP10s are equipped with internal super-capacitors that will save the current data for up to 5 minutes while the battery is swapped.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10Charging the Battery14 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualKeep in mind also that, along with the battery, the EP10 is equipped with internal, super-capacitors that preserves data stored on the EP10 for a short period of time while the battery is swapped.2.2.4.1 Chargers and Docking StationsLithium-Ion battery packs must be charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking stations. These include:• AC wall adaptor (Model No. R3055) operates as an AC power source and when plugged in, also charges the battery installed in the EP10. (see page 237)• Desktop Docking Station (Model No. RV4000) operates as both a charger and a docking station. Operating as a charger, both the battery installed in the EP10 and a spare battery can be charged simultaneously. (see page 225)• Quad Docking Station (Model No. RV4004) can charge the battery of up to four EP10s inserted in the docking station. (see page 230)• Quad Battery Charger (Model No. RV3004) can charge up to four batteries inserted in the charger (see TBD)• USB & Charger Snap Module (Model No. RV4001) allows you to connect a Mini-B USB cable and a power cable to the EP10. (see TBD)• DE9 RS232 & charger Snap Module (Model No. V4002) provides an RS232 connec-tion and charge power to the EP10. (see TBD)Note: Do not leave a spare battery to charge for more than 72 hours. Charging for more than 72 hours may damage the battery or lead to charge capacity reduction.Important: If the battery is overheated (>60° C) or if the battery capacity is very low (<100 mAh), the unit will not switch on when the Power key is pressed. Under the above conditions, when AC power is applied, the EP10 will still refuse to power up; instead, a yellow LED will begin blinking and until the battery is replaced, or in the case of low battery capacity, the battery is charged to an acceptable level, the EP10 will not switch on.Important: FOR DETAILED INFORMATION about chargers and docking stations, refer to Chapter 6: “Peripheral Devices & Accessories” beginning on page 215. Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10The KeyboardEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 152.3 The Keyboard2.3.1 EP10 QWERTY KeyboardThe EP10 is available with a QWERTY keyboard with [Send] and [End] phone keys.Figure 2.3  QWERTY Keyboard with Phone KeysMost of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer. Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, the differences are noted.The [BLUE] modifier key provide access to additional keys and system functions. These functions are colour coded in blue print above the keyboard keys.Note: Refer to “Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time” on page 23 for addi-tional information about the battery.Important: To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10Locking the Keyboard16 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual2.3.2 Locking the KeyboardYou can lock the keyboard to prevent accidental key presses. To set up the locking/unlock-ing key sequence:• Tap on Start>Settings>Buttons. Tap on the right arrow icon  in the bottom-right corner of the screen to scroll to the Lock Sequence tab.Refer to “Lock Sequence” on page 106 for details about setting up this function.2.3.3 Modifier KeysThe [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], and [BLUE] keys are modifier keys. Pressing a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed. For example, on a QWERTY keyboard, the ‘@’ symbol is printed in blue on the [A] key. Pressing the [BLUE] key, a modifier key, fol-lowed by the [A] key displays the ‘@’ symbol rather than the letter A.The [SHIFT], [CTRL] and [ALT] keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded (two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified.2.3.3.1 Activating Modifier Keys & the Shift-State IndicatorWhen a modifier key is pressed, it is represented in the shift-state indicator icon in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen, making it easier to determine whether or not a modi-fier key is active. If the shift-state indicator icon is not visible (you can only see the soft keyboard icon), you may need to take a few steps to display the shift-state indicator icon.• Tap on Start>Settings followed by the Buttons icon.• Tap on the One Shots tab at the bottom of the screen.• Tap in the check box next to Show modifier key state to display the shift-state indicator icon.Note: Almost all keys can be reprogrammed to suit your requirements.Note: Keep in mind that the [ALT] and [CTRL] keys are only available on key-pads that are not equipped with phone keys. You can, however, access the [CTRL] key using the onscreen, soft keyboard.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10The KeysEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 17Figure 2.4  Shift-State Indicator Icon2.3.3.2 Locking Modifier KeysWhen a modifier key is locked ‘on’, it will remain active until it is pressed again to unlock or turn it off. To help you identify when a modifier key is locked ‘on’, the key is represented in the shift-state indicator icon with a black frame around it. Figure 2.5  Shift-State Indicator Icon – Locked Modifier KeyOnce a modifier key is unlocked or turned off, it is no longer displayed in the shift-state in-dicator icon.2.3.4 The KeysThe [SHIFT] KeyThe [SHIFT] key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and provide access to the symbols above the numeric keys. You can lock this key ‘on’ so that when you press an alpha Soft Keyboard IconShift-State Indicator Icon replaces Soft Keyboard IconNote: The locking behaviour of the modifier keys can be changed so that, for example, pressing a modifier key once will lock the key ‘on’. Refer to “One Shots” on page 99 for details. Note too that by default, the [ORANGE] key is locked ‘on’ when pressed only once.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10The Keys18 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manualkey, an upper case character is displayed. When you press a numeric key, the associated symbol on the numeric key is displayed on the screen.If you press the [SHIFT] key twice, it is locked ‘on’ essentially acting as a [CAPS] key, dis-playing uppercase characters. In this state, if you type a numeric key, the number rather than the symbol above it is displayed. Press [SHIFT] again to turn the [CAPS] function off.The Arrow KeysThe Arrow keys are located near the top of the keyboard. The arrow keys move the cursor around the screen–up, down, left and right. The cursor is the flashing box or underline char-acter that indicates where the next character you type will appear.The [BKSP/DEL] KeyThe [BKSP] key (sometimes referred to as destructive backspace) moves the cursor one character to the left, erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke. The [DEL] key ([BLUE] [BKSP]) erases the character at the cursor position.The [ALT] and [CTRL] KeysThe [ALT] and [CTRL] keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent.The [TAB] KeyTypically, the [TAB] key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward.The [ESC] KeyGenerally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialog box or activity and return to the previous one.The [SPACE] KeyPressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialog box, press-ing the [SPACE] key enables or disables a checkbox.The [SCAN] KeysThe EP10 is equipped with two [SCAN] keys located on the keyboard just below the display along with [SCAN] buttons situated on the left and right sides of the hand-held. [SCAN] keys activate the scanner beam. For units that do not have internal scanners, these keys can be remapped to serve other functions.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10The Keypad BacklightEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 19The Function Keys–[F1] to [F10]Function keys [F1] to [F10] perform special, custom-defined functions. These keys are ac-cessed by pressing [BLUE] followed by numeric keys [1] to [10]. They can be used with the Windows Mobile 6.5 operating system or another application. The Macro KeysWhile macro keys are not physically stamped on the keyboard, up to 12 macro functions can be added using the Scancode Remapping function. Refer to “Scancode Remapping” on page 103 for details about mapping keys.For details about creating a macro, refer to “Keyboard Macro Keys” on page 101.2.3.5 The Keypad BacklightThe intensity of the keypad backlight can be configured using the Backlight icon accessed by tapping on Start>Settings. Refer to “Backlight” on page 120 for details about this option.2.4 The DisplayEP10s are equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions. The backlight switches on when a key is pressed or the screen is tapped.2.4.1 Setting the Backlight Intensity & DurationTo set the backlight intensity and the duration of time that the backlight will remain on, you’ll need to choose the Backlight icon. • Tap on Start>Settings and then, tap on System tab>Backlight icon.Refer to “Backlight” on page 120 for details.2.4.2 Adjusting the Backlight using the KeyboardThe display backlight can be adjusted using a keyboard key sequence. The key sequence varies depending on the type of keyboard:•For alphanumeric keyboards, lock the [ORANGE] key ‘on’. Press [ESC] until a satis-factory brightness level is attained.(TBD)Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen20 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual2.4.3 Aligning (Calibrating) the TouchscreenIf your touchscreen has never been aligned (calibrated) or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, follow the steps below.• Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab to display the Screen icon.• Tap on the Screen icon to display the Alignment tab.Important: Keep in mind that this sequence cycles the display backlight up to full bright-ness and once reached, begins to dim the backlight until the display fades to black – nothing is visible. At this point, you’ll need to continue pressing these keys until the display brightens up to a usable level.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10Screen OrientationEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 21• Tap on the Align Screen button, and follow the directions on the screen to align (cali-brate) the screen.2.4.4 Screen OrientationIn addition to screen calibration, the Screen icon allows you to determine how your screen will be oriented – portrait or landscape (right- or left-handed). • Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.• Tap on the Screen icon.•In the General tab, tap on the orientation that best suits the way in which you use your EP10.2.5 EP10 IndicatorsThe EP10 uses LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), onscreen messages and audio tones to indicate the various conditions of the EP10, the batteries, the scans and so on.2.5.1 LEDsThree LEDs are located on the upper-right side of the EP10, just above the display. When you press the Power button, the LED flashes yellow to indicate that the EP10 has been powered up. The LED table following outlines the behaviour of the LED while the EP10 is docked in a charger.Keep in mind that the application running on the EP10 can dictate how the application LED operates. Review the documentation provided with your application to determine LED behaviour. Note: This window provides two additional tabs: ClearType and Text Size. Tapping on the ClearType tab allows you to enable the ClearType option to smooth screen font appearance. The Text Size tab allows you to increase or decrease the size of the font displayed on the screen.Table 2.1  Function of EP10 LEDsLED FunctionGreen Charge LED(left-most LED)Charge indicator. See the table below for descriptions of Charge LED behaviour.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10Audio Indicators22 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualIf the EP10 is attached to an external power supply, the charge LED (the left-most LED) re-flects the battery charge status.2.6 Audio IndicatorsThe audio speaker provides a variety of sounds when a key is pressed, a keyboard character is rejected, scan input is accepted or rejected, an operator’s entry does not match in a match field or the battery is low. To specify how you want your EP10 to respond under various conditions, refer to “Sounds” on page 117.2.6.1 Adjusting Speaker VolumeThe Vo l um e  button is located on the left side of the EP10, just above the Scan button. It is a rocker button; pressing the top half of the button increases volume while pressing the bottom half of the button decreases it.Yellow Application LED (centre LED)Application LED. This LEDs behaviour is application dependent. Blue Radio Power LED (right-most LED)Radio power indicator.Table 2.2  EP10 Charge LED BehaviourLED Behaviour Charge StatusSolid Green Charge completeSlow Blinking Green (LED off longer than on)Charge in progress. Battery charged to less than 80% capacity.Long Blinking Green (LED on longer than off)Battery charged to greater than 80% capacity.Fast Blinking Green (LED switches on and off rapidly)Charge failure. (Defective battery or battery outside tempera-ture range (0° C to 50° C))Table 2.1  Function of EP10 LEDsLED FunctionNote: When the Power button is pressed, the yellow LED will flash to let you know that the hand-held is powered up. At this point, you can go ahead and release the Power button.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run TimeEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 232.7 Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run TimeAs Lithium-Ion batteries age, their capacity decreases gradually, and they are generally con-sidered depleted after approximately 2 years of use (less than 60% of original capacity remaining). Keep in mind however that heavy usage or operating the EP10 at temperature extremes will shorten the battery life.Lithium-Ion batteries do not require conditioning cycles and the EP10 battery system (in-cluding chargers) requires no user interaction to maintain peak performance.To maximize the run time of your batteries, consider the following:• The display backlight is a large drain on the battery. Try to keep its brightness as low as possible. • The EP10 is ‘event’ driven – that is, when it is not in use, the EP10 reverts to sleep mode (even when it appears to be running), saving battery power. Events include a key press, touchscreen taps and scan triggers. Power consumption is reduced if you avoid unnecessary events, and allow the EP10 to sleep as much as possible.• The battery is a ‘smart battery’ with built-in intelligence. Tapping on the Power icon under Start>Settings>System tab displays a dialog box that pro-vides detailed information about the battery status of the battery installed in your EP10. • When the EP10 is switched off, it goes into a low-power, suspend state but continues to draw a small amount of power from the battery. This should not be an issue unless the EP10 is left in suspend state for more than a week – for long-term storage, the battery should be removed.2.7.1 Storing BatteriesLong term battery storage is not recommended. If storage is necessary:• Always try to use a ‘first-in first-out’ approach to minimize storage time.• Lithium-Ion batteries age much faster at elevated temperatures. Store batteries at tem-peratures between 0° C and 20° C. • Always charge batteries to at least 40 to 60% before storing them. Batteries can be damaged by an over-discharge phenomenon that occurs when an empty battery is stored for a long period of time such that the cell voltage drops below a lower limit. • To minimize storage degradation, recharge stored batteries to 40 to 60% every 4 or 6 months to prevent over-discharge damage.Note: When the battery is at 50% capacity, a ‘low battery’ warning is displayed. When the battery is at about 10% capacity, a ‘very low battery’ notification bubble appears.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10Uploading Data in a Docking Station24 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• A ‘never used’ Lithium-Ion battery that has been stored for 3 years may have limited or no useful life remaining once put into service. Think of batteries as perishable goods.2.8 Uploading Data in a Docking StationThe desktop docking station and quad docking station are typically used to upload transac-tion data to a server computer when a radio link is not available.The desktop docking station can complete batch uploads to a Client USB connected PC or server. An optional 10/100baseT Ethernet module is also available.Unlike the desktop docking station, the quad docking station supports only TCP/IP connec-tions to a PC or server through a 10/100baseT Ethernet connection.When an EP10 is properly inserted in a docking station, a dock icon is displayed in the navigation bar at the top of the screen. The EP10 also detects the presence of the Ethernet network.2.9 Bluetooth RadioThe EP10 is equipped with an on-board Bluetooth radio. This type of radio enables short range data communication between devices. The Bluetooth also provides the capability to use a Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone as a data modem, exchanging information with other Bluetooth devices. Refer to “The Bluetooth GPRS Phone” on page 180 for setup details.Important: Review the documentation provided with the user application installed in your EP10 before performing data uploads.Note: Refer to “Chargers and Docking Stations” on page 223 for more details.Note: Integrated Bluetooth radios are standard on EP10 units. Keep in mind also that Bluetooth is available simultaneously with WAN and 802.11g on a single EP10.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10Pairing a Bluetooth HeadsetEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 252.9.1 Pairing a Bluetooth Headset Before pairing a headset or any other Bluetooth device with your EP10, make certain that the Bluetooth device power is enabled; it is enabled by default. If, for some reason, it has been disabled:• Tap on Start>Settings>System tab and then, tap on the Power icon to display the Power dialog box.• Tap on the Built-in Devices tab, and tap in the checkbox next to Enable Bluetooth. • Next, tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Bluetooth icon.• Tap on the Mode tab, and check Turn on Bluetooth. Tap OK.• Turn your headset on and place it within a few feet of your EP10.• If needed, set your headset to visible so that the EP10 can detect it and establish a connection.Most headsets are in pairing mode by default. If this is not the case, follow the headset man-ufacturer’s instructions to place the headset in pairing mode.• Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Bluetooth icon.•In the Devices tab, tap Add new device. Wait for the EP10 to scan for devices.• Choose the headset device from the list and tap on Next.If the headset has authentication enabled, the EP10 then prompts you to provide a passcode.• Type the passcode (or PIN – Personal Identification Number), and then tap on Next.The EP10 then displays a list of services. Choose the Hands Free service. (If you are at-tempting to pair another device, choose it from this list.)•With Hands Free checked (enabled), tap Finish. The headset is now paired.2.10 Inserting the microSD and SIM CardThere are two card holders available in the battery compartment of the EP10 – the lower holder is provided for a microSD (micro Secure Digital) and the upper holder is for a SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card. The microSD cards provide additional non-volatile memory to your EP10. SIM cards provide access to the voice option, the Internet, and so on. Note: Headset pairing information is also available in the Getting Started Centre in the Today screen on your EP10. Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10Inserting the Cards26 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual2.10.1 Inserting the Cards• Switch off the EP10 – press and hold down the Power key, and when the Shutdown screen is displayed, choose Shutdown and tap on OK.• Slide the battery latch to the right to unlock the battery, and remove it.• Pull the SD door down as the arrow icon on the door indicates.(TBD)• Orient the microSD or SIM card according to the legend stamped into the plastic. the SD and SIM doors have guides or rails into which you can slide the card• For microSD, slide the card into the guides in the microSD door on the left-hand slot.(TBD) • For SIM cards, slide the card in the right-hand slot.(TBD)• Slide the protective door back into place, and snap it shut.2.11 The CameraA built-in digital camera is available for the EP10. This option allows you snap still photo-graphs or create short video clips. The Pictures & Videos applet is used to access and configure the camera. For more details about the camera, refer to “Pictures & Videos” on page 75.2.12 General Maintenance2.12.1 Caring for the TouchscreenThe top of the touchscreen is a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside. The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches. Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic, or crack the internal conductive coating.The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen:• sodium hydroxide,• concentrated caustic solutions,• benzyl alcohol, and• concentrated acids.If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments, consider applying a disposable screen pro-tector (model number CH6110TBD). These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen. When they become scratched and abraded, they are easily removed and replaced.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 2: Getting to Know the EP10Cleaning the EP10EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 272.12.2 Cleaning the EP10• Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the EP10 unit.• Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.• To clean ink marks from the keypad or touchscreen, use isopropyl alcohol.Important: Do not immerse the EP10 in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean.Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 29USING WINDOWS EMBEDDED 6.5 33.1 Navigating in Windows Embedded 6.5 and Applications...............313.1.1 Navigating using a Touchscreen and Stylus.................313.2 Windows Embedded 6.5 Desktop – Today Screen...................313.2.1 Windows Embedded 6.5 Navigation Bar ..................323.2.2 Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm.......................343.2.3 Ownership Information............................363.2.4 E-mail Notification..............................373.2.5 Task Notification...............................373.2.6 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments . . ..................403.2.6.1 Creating and Editing Appointments.................403.2.6.2 Adding Reminders .........................413.2.6.3 Using Categories..........................423.2.6.4 Deleting Appointments .......................433.3 Start Menu.......................................433.3.1 Customising the Start Menu.........................433.4 Managing Files and Folders..............................443.4.1 Creating a New Folder............................453.4.2 Renaming a File...............................453.4.3 Copying a File . ...............................453.4.4 Deleting a File................................463.5 Using Menus......................................463.5.1 Pop-Up Menus................................463.6 The Softkey Bar ....................................473.7 Programs – Using Applications ............................493.8 Settings.........................................503.9 Help...........................................513.10 Entering Text.....................................523.10.1 Soft Keyboard................................523.10.2 The Transcriber...............................53Preliminary Draft
30 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual3.10.3 Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer ..................54Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Navigating in Windows Embedded 6.5 and ApplicationsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 313.1 Navigating in Windows Embedded 6.5 and ApplicationsGraphic user interfaces like Windows Embedded 6.5 for portable devices or desktop Windows (2000, XP, etc.) utilize ‘point and click’ navigation. On the EP10, this is accom-plished using a touchscreen and stylus rather than a mouse.3.1.1 Navigating using a Touchscreen and StylusA touchscreen is a standard feature on all EP10s. Each is equipped with a stylus – a pointing tool – stored in a slot at the bottom of the unit.• Use the stylus to tap on the appropriate icon to open files and folders, launch applica-tions and programs, make selections, and so on.3.2 Windows Embedded 6.5 Desktop – Today ScreenKeep in mind that if your EP10 is running Windows Embedded 6.5, the Today screen will offer Phone connectivity in the Navigation Bar at the top of the screen and a Phone softkey in the Softkey Bar at the bottom of the screen. Note: If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately, it may need recali-bration. Refer to “Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen” on page 20.Calendar-Upcoming AppointmentsBattery Charge StateTod a y’s  D a teE-mail NotificationTasks To CompleteConnectivity Indicator Volume ControlStart Button Navigation BarSoftkey BarClockPhone SettingsPhone SoftkeyWiFi & BluetoothGetting StartedOwnershipPreliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Windows Embedded 6.5 Navigation Bar32 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualThe Today screen displays all your important information – tasks, unread e-mails and up-coming appointments – all in one place. The Start menu provides access to everything else you’ll need.3.2.1 Windows Embedded 6.5 Navigation BarThe navigation bar along the top of the screen provides icons that, when tapped, open their associated programs. If you’re unit is equipped with Windows Embedded 6.5, you’ll be see a Phone hotkey for quick access to phone settings.Start ButtonTapping on the Start button displays the Start menu.Start ButtonConnectivity Battery CapacityVolume ControlHotkeysPhone SettingsNavigation BarNote: When a peripheral is attached to the docking/usb port of the EP10, an associated icon is displayed briefly in the navigation bar to indicate that the EP10 has recog-nized the connection.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Windows Embedded 6.5 Navigation BarEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 33Connectivity The Connectivity hotkey provides a shortcut to the Connections tab in the Settings window. This tab provides access to Bluetooth, network, network card and internet connection setups. Phone SettingsIf your EP10 is running Windows Embedded 6.5, it is equipped with a phone option. An EP10 in which a SIM card and radio are installed can access phone settings along with the Wireless Manager from this pop-up bubble. Any active connections are also listed here.Volume ControlTapping on this icon displays a sliding tab that allows you to adjust the speaker volume or turn the speaker on and off.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm34 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualTwo volume adjustments are provided – one for the speaker volume and the other for the phone dialer volume.Battery CapacityTapping on the Battery hotkey displays the Battery tab allowing you to view the remaining battery capacity in the battery.3.2.2 Today’s Date, Clock and AlarmThis option displays the current date. If you need to adjust the date or set an alarm:•In the Today screen, tap on today’s date.PhoneDialer VolumeVolumeSpeakerPreliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Today’s Date, Clock and AlarmEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 35The Clock & Alarms screen is displayed.• Tap on the drop-down menu arrows to set the GMT, time and date.An option to set the date and time for a visiting time zone is also available.To set an alarm:• Tap on the Alarms tab.You can set a maximum of three alarms.• Tap in the checkbox to enable an alarm.• Tap the day on which you want the alarm to go off – Sunday through Saturday.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Ownership Information36 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap on the time to display the clock.• To set the time, in the time field below the clock, tap on the hour to highlight it, and type the hour at which you want the alarm to ring. To set the minutes, highlight the min-utes, and type the appropriate minutes, orYou can also assign the alarm activation time using the clock graphic. Position the stylus on the hour hand of the clock, and drag it to the correct hour. Do the same for the minute hand.• Tap on OK to save your changes.3.2.3 Ownership InformationThis option allows you to add your personal information to the EP10. Some of this informa-tion will be displayed in the desktop Today screen.Time FieldNote: Tapping on the ‘More’ tab displays a dialog box in which you can choose to ‘Dis-play the clock on the title bar in all programs’.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5E-mail NotificationEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 37• Tap on Owner, listed in the Today screen as Tap here to set owner information to display a screen in which you can type information.• Type your name, company name, address, telephone number and e-mail address. The Ownership screen has two additional tabs–Notes where you can add any pertinent, addi-tional information and Options where you can specify whether you want the desktop to display your ‘identification’ information or your ‘note’ information.3.2.4 E-mail NotificationIf you have any e-mail, it will be indicated in the Today desktop screen. To view your e-mail, tap on the E-mail notification option represented by an icon in the shape of an envelope.Refer to “Messaging” on page 84 for details about setting up your Inbox.3.2.5 Task NotificationTasks lets you create lists of entries representing your responsibilities, upcoming projects, and so on. If you’ve assigned any tasks, this option lets you know how many active tasks you have. Note: You can type information using the EP10 keyboard, or you can tap on the soft key-board icon in the bottom right corner of the softkey bar to display an onscreen keyboard.Note: You can synchronize the Task Notification option using ActiveSync so that any tasks are displayed on your EP10 as well as your PC. Refer to “Synchronization” on page 59 for details.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Task Notification38 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap on the Task s option to display a list of tasks.Creating a Task• Tap in the field labelled Tap here to add a new task. The text is replaced with a blink-ing cursor. If you prefer to type the task using the soft keyboard, tap on the soft keyboard icon in the softkey bar.• Type your task description.• Tap anywhere in the blank part of the screen, or press the Power button to add the task to your list.Editing a Task• Tap on a task in the task list to highlight it. Tap Edit in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen to display a detailed task screen where you can define task characteristics.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Task NotificationEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 39Figure 3.1  Task Details ScreenEach of the nine items in this screen, when tapped, displays a drop-down menu where you can choose from a list of options.• Once you’ve completed all the appropriate fields, tap on OK to save your changes.The task will be listed in the Today screen as an Active Task.Deleting a Task• Press and hold the stylus on a task until a pop-up menu is displayed.• Tap on Delete Task.Marking a Task as Completed•In the Tasks list, tap the checkbox next to the items that are completed.Sorting Tasks•In the Tasks list, tap on the Menu option in the lower-right corner of softkey bar, and tap on Sort By.You can choose from Status, Priority, Subject, Start Date or Due Date. The tasks are ar-ranged in the list according to the criterion you chose.Limiting the Tasks Displayed in the Task Screen• Tap on Menu in the lower-right corner of softkey bar, and tap on Filter.Note: You can also tap on the Notes tab to add additional information about the task your are defining.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Calendar of Upcoming Appointments40 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualYou can choose All Tasks, Recently Viewed, No Categories, Active Tasks, or Completed Tasks. The tasks are displayed on the screen according to the preference you chose.3.2.6 Calendar of Upcoming AppointmentsThis option is used to map out all your upcoming appointments, meetings and so on in the weeks, months and years ahead.• Tap on the Upcoming Appointments option in the Today screen, or tap on Start>Calendar to display the calendar. The default calendar displays an Agenda of appointments for the week, divided into days. You can choose to leave the calendar as is, or you can tap on the Day softkey to reflect the Week, Month or Yea r .3.2.6.1 Creating and Editing Appointments•In the Calendar screen, tap on Menu in the softkey bar, and then tap on New Appointment.Note: You can synchronize the Calendar using ActiveSync so that any meetings, appoint-ments and so on are displayed on your EP10 Today screen as well as on your PC. Refer to “Synchronization” on page 59 for details.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Calendar of Upcoming AppointmentsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 41Figure 3.2  Appointment Detail Screen•In the Subject field, name the appointment.• Complete the remaining fields to reflect your appointment details.• Tap on OK to save your changes and close the screen.3.2.6.2 Adding RemindersIf you want to be reminded in advance of an appointment:•In the Reminder field, choose Remind me from the drop-down menu.• In the second Reminder field, tap on the number in the field to display a drop-down menu where you can define a numeric value of 1, 5, 10, 15, 30. Tap on minute(s) to display a drop-down menu from which you can choose the time unit for your reminder – minute(s), hour(s), day(s) or week(s).•Tap OK to finish. You are returned to the view you were in before adding the reminder.Note: Refer to “Adding Reminders” on page 41 for details about reminders. Refer to“Using Categories” on page 42 for information about this option.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Calendar of Upcoming Appointments42 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap the appointment in the Calendar screen to display it in a summary screen. The reminder is indicated by the small, bell icon.3.2.6.3 Using CategoriesCategories help you organize and track the different types of data you keep on your EP10.To assign an appointment to a category:• Tap on an appointment in the Today screen. In the Calendar screen, tap on the appointment again.• Tap the Categories field to display the Categories screen.• Tap in the checkbox next to the category to which you want to assign the appointment.•Tap OK. Your appointment is assigned to the category or categories you chose.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Start MenuEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 433.2.6.4 Deleting Appointments• Tap and hold the stylus on the appointment you want to delete.• Tap on Delete Appointment in the pop-up menu.3.3 Start MenuTo display the Start menu:• Tap on the Start button in the upper-left corner of the Navigation Bar.• Tap on the Start menu item with which you want to work.3.3.1 Customising the Start MenuYou can choose the items you want to appear in the Start menu – items you use most often.Note: You can create a new category by tapping on New in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen.Most recently command centreWindows MobileNavigation Barused programsStart ButtonCustom-chosenprogramsPreliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Managing Files and Folders44 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap on Start>Settings.•In the Personal tab, tap on the Menus icon.• Tap the checkboxes next to the items you would like to appear in your Start menu. When you’ve completed your selections, tap on OK.3.4 Managing Files and FoldersWindows Embedded 6.5 files are stored in folders and sub-folders that are accessible with File Explorer. You can open, save, rename, copy and paste files in the same manner as you would on any desktop PC.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Creating a New FolderEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 45• Tap on Start>Programs>File Explorer.3.4.1 Creating a New Folder•Tap Start>Programs>File Explorer.•Tap Menu>New Folder in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen.• Use the EP10 keyboard or the soft keyboard to assign a name to the folder.3.4.2 Renaming a File• Press and hold the stylus on the file you want to rename. A ring of dots is displayed fol-lowed by a pop-up menu.•Tap Rename. The file name is highlighted. Type a new name.3.4.3 Copying a File• Press and hold the stylus on the file you want to copy. A ring of dots is displayed fol-lowed by a pop-up menu.• Tap on Copy in the pop-up menu.• Navigate to the location where you want to copy the file.• Press and hold the stylus in a blank area of the screen—away from other icons—until a pop-up menu is displayed.• Tap Paste to copy the file to the new location.Files stored here automa-Tap to display sorting optionsTa p  t o  m o v e  back one levelTap to display additionalstorage/filesticallyPreliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Deleting a File46 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual3.4.4 Deleting a File• Press and hold the stylus on the file or folder you want to delete until a pop-up menu is displayed.•Tap Delete to remove the file.3.5 Using MenusIn Windows Embedded 6.5, the menu is located in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen.To execute a command:• Tap on Menu to display the commands associated with it, and then tap on the command you want to execute.3.5.1 Pop-Up MenusPop-up menus are available in many screens and programs. They offer quick access to a group of useful commands in addition to those available in the menu bar. To display a pop-up menu:Softkey Bar MenuPreliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5The Softkey BarEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 47• Gently press and hold the stylus on the screen. A ring of dots is displayed on the screen followed by a pop-up menu.• Tap on the command you want to execute.3.6 The Softkey BarThe EP10 is equipped with a softkey bar at the bottom of the screen. It displays softkeys that allow you to access menus and commands. It also displays the soft keyboard icon.SoftkeysTapping on a softkey displays information associated with the softkey–for example, in the sample screen above, the Menu softkey displays the commands associated with Word Mobile. The View softkey lets you to tailor how the Word document will be displayed.Softkey BarSoftkeysSoft keyboard icon Soft keyboardPreliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5The Softkey Bar48 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualThe Soft Keyboard IconTapping on the soft keyboard icon displays an onscreen keyboard you can use as an alterna-tive to the EP10 keyboard.Shift-State Indicator IconThe softkey bar can also display the shift-state indicator icon. This icon indicates active modifier keys–[SHIFT], [ALT], [CTRL], [ORANGE] and [BLUE]. • Tap on Start>Settings>Buttons>One Shots. Tap in the checkbox next to Show modi-fier key state, to replace the soft keyboard icon with the shift-state indicator icon.When a modifier key is pressed, it is displayed in the shift-state indicator icon. In the example above, the [ORANGE] key was activated.To distinguish a ‘locked’ modifier key – a key that has been locked ‘on’ – from a modifier key that is only active until the next key is pressed, ‘locked’ keys are encircled in a black frame in the shift-state indicator icon. Refer to “Activating Modifier Keys & the Shift-State Indicator” on page 16 for details.Shift-state indicator iconNote: You can still access the soft keyboard while the shift-state indicator icon is displayed. Tapping on this icon displays the soft keyboard. Tapping on the shift-state indicator icon again removes the soft keyboard. Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Programs – Using ApplicationsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 493.7 Programs – Using Applications•Tap Start>Programs to display the programs installed on your EP10.Figure 3.3  Program Screen IconsOpening an Application• Tap on a Program icon to launch the associated program.Minimizing an Application• Tap on the X button in the upper-right corner of an application screen to minimize the application. Note: Although it looks like a Close button, this button does not close the application–it only minimizes it.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Settings50 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualOpening, Closing and Switching Applications• Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab and then the Task M a nager icon – the Task Manager screen is opened.The Task Manager screen lists all running tasks (applications). This applet provides a number of options to manage your opened applications. •End Task: To shut down an application, highlight the program in the list, and tap on the End Task softkey in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen.•End All Tasks: To shut down all applications, tap on the Menu softkey, and choose End All Tasks.•Switch To: To make an application listed in this screen active, highlight the application, and tap on Menu>Switch To.For additional information about the Task Manager, refer to “Task Manager” on page 145.3.8 Settings•Tap Start>Settings to display the setting options for your EP10.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5HelpEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 51Figure 3.4  Settings IconsSettings are divided into three tabs – Personal, System and Connections. Refer to Chapter 5: “Settings” for details about the options available to you.3.9 HelpTapping on the Help option displays a screen of help topics that are content-specific; if for example, the Today screen is displayed and you tap on Start>Help, the help screen will provide topics about the Today screen. You can perform a help content search by tapping on the Contents or Search softkeys. Keep in mind that help is not always available.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Entering Text52 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual3.10 Entering TextYou can enter text using either the soft keyboard or the EP10 keyboard. You can also use the Transcriber to handwrite information directly on the touchscreen using your stylus.• Open an existing document or create a new one– tap Start>Office Mobile>Word Mobile and tap on New in the softkey bar to create a new document.If you’re using the EP10 keyboard to enter text, there are no special steps. Just begin typing – the text, spaces, etc. will appear in the document.3.10.1 Soft KeyboardThe soft keyboard is laid out just like the keypad on a PC keyboard. By tapping the stylus on letters and modifier keys like the [SHIFT] key, you can enter text in a document.If the soft keyboard is not already displayed:• Tap on the soft keyboard icon in the softkey bar.• Tap on the keys in the soft keyboard to enter text in your document.To switch to a numeric keyboard:• Tap on the 123 key in the upper-left corner of the soft keyboard.• Tap on this key again to return to the standard keyboard.Note: For additional information about tailoring text entry using the soft keyboard, the transcriber, the block recognizer and the letter recognizer, refer to “Input” on page 107.Soft KeyboardSoft Keyboard IconPreliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5The TranscriberEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 533.10.2 The TranscriberTo access the Transcriber, with your document opened:• Tap on the arrow next to the keyboard icon, and choose Transcriber from the pop-up menu.• Review the introductory screen. It provides some shortcut symbols you can draw on your screen to work with the Transcriber. • When you’ve finished reading the introductory screen, tap OK.The Transcriber menu and icon bars are displayed at the bottom of the document.Figure 3.5  Transcriber Screen• Use your stylus to write a few words anywhere on the screen.After a few seconds, your words are recognized (or not) and are transcribed into typed text.Editing Text within the TranscriberWith your document open, make certain that you are in transcriber mode–the Transcriber icon should be displayed in the lower-right corner of the softkey bar.• Double-tap to select a word or triple-tap to select a paragraph, orDraw a line through the text you want to select and wait a few seconds until the Tran-scriber highlights the text.• Once the text is highlighted, write the new text that is to replace the highlighted infor-mation, orTranscriber IconNote: Character recognition is more successful if you write using large letters.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer54 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualPress and hold the stylus on the selected text to display a pop-up menu. Choose Cut, Copy, Paste or Clear (delete).3.10.3 Block Recognizer and Letter RecognizerWhile the Transcriber attempts to recognize natural handwriting and transcribe it, Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer attempt to teach you how to conform your handwriting to what the EP10 can recognize.Block Recognizer• Open a document, and tap on the arrow next to the input icon. Choose Block Recognizer.There are two points to remember when using Block Recognizer. First, limit your writing to the Block Recognizer input panel–do not write in the body of the document. Second, write only uppercase letters with your stylus.• Tap on the ? icon in the Recognizer Icon Bar to display the Character Recognizer screen. This screen provides a visual demonstration of how to enter letters that will be recognized. Tap on a character in the soft keyboard for a demonstration of how to form a recognizable letter.•In the Block Recognizer panel, write letters to the left (abc) and numbers to the right (123) on the input panel. Remember to write using uppercase letters–they will be printed on the screen as lowercase unless you follow the step below to create an upper-case letter.Note: You can also use the softkey bar tools or the shortcuts listed in the introductory screen to help you edit a document within the Transcriber.Recognizer Icon BarInput PanelInput IconPreliminary Draft
Chapter 3: Using Windows Embedded 6.5Block Recognizer and Letter RecognizerEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 55• To create an uppercase character, draw a line straight up the ‘abc’ panel.• Use the Recognizer Icon Bar to move around the screen, add spaces, special characters, and so on.Letter Recognizer• Open a document, and tap on the arrow next to the input icon. Choose Letter Recognizer.There are two points to remember when using Letter Recognizer. First, limit your writing to the Letter Recognizer Input Panel–do not write in the body of the document. Second, write only lowercase letters with your stylus.• Tap on the ? icon in the Recognizer Icon Bar to display the Character Recognizer screen. This screen provides a visual demonstration of how to enter letters that will be recognized. Tap on a character in the soft keyboard for a demonstration of how to form a recognizable letter.• To create an uppercase character, write a lowercase letter on the left side (ABC) of the input panel.• To create a lowercase character, write a lowercase letter in the middle (abc) of the input panel.• Write numbers on the right side (123) of the input panel.Recognizer Icon BarInput PanelInput IconPreliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 57PROGRAMS 44.1 Programs........................................594.2 Games .........................................594.3 ActiveSync®......................................594.3.1 Synchronization ...............................594.4 Calculator........................................604.5 Demo Scanner.....................................604.6 Office Mobile......................................604.6.1 Excel Mobile.................................604.6.1.1 Workbook Components .......................614.6.2 OneNote Mobile...............................614.6.3 Word Mobile.................................674.6.3.1 Data Entry Modes..........................684.6.3.2 Sharing Documents with your PC .................684.6.4 PowerPoint Mobile..............................684.7 File Explorer......................................694.8 Getting Started.....................................694.9 PTSI Imager Demo...................................694.10 Internet Sharing....................................704.10.1 Creating an Internet Connection ......................704.10.2 Using Internet Sharing ...........................704.11 Notes .........................................714.11.1 Creating a Note...............................714.11.2 Converting Handwritten Notes to Text...................724.11.3 Renaming a Note..............................744.11.4 Recording Notes...............................744.11.5 Synchronizing a Note............................754.12 Pictures & Videos...................................754.12.1 Using the Camera..............................754.12.2 Moving Photos to the EP10.........................77Preliminary Draft
58 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual4.12.3 Opening a Photo...............................774.12.4 Deleting a Photo...............................784.12.5 Editing a Photo................................784.12.6 Creating a Slide Show............................784.12.7 Using the Video Recorder..........................794.13 Remote Desktop Mobile................................804.13.1 Connecting to a Terminal Server. . .....................814.13.2 Disconnecting without Ending a Session ..................814.13.3 Ending a Session...............................814.14 Search .........................................824.15 Task Manager .....................................824.16 Tasks..........................................824.17 Internet Explorer....................................824.17.1 Browsing Web Sites.............................834.18 Messaging.......................................844.18.1 Folders....................................844.18.2 Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook.....................844.18.3 Changing Synchronization Settings.....................864.19 Windows Media....................................87Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsProgramsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 594.1 ProgramsThe Programs menu provides access to all the applications available on your EP10.• Tap on Start>Programs to display this screen.Tapping on an icon in this screen launches the associated applet.Figure 4.1  Programs Tabs4.2 GamesYour EP10 is equipped with a few standard games – Bubble Breaker and Solitaire – should you feel the need to pass the time.4.3 ActiveSync®For PCs using the Microsoft Windows XP operating system, ActiveSync® – Microsoft PC connectivity software – can be used to connect the EP10 to PCs running this software. By connecting the EP10 to a PC through your desktop docking station and running ActiveSync on the PC, you can view EP10 files, drag and drop files between the EP10 and the PC, connect to the Internet, and so on.4.3.1 SynchronizationFor details about synchronizing your PC with you EP10, visit the following Microsoft inter-net site:http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/activesync/default.mspxPreliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsCalculator60 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual4.4 CalculatorTapping on Start>Programs>Calculator displays a standard calculator. • Use your stylus to tap the calculator buttons.4.5 Demo ScannerThe Demo Scanner icon is used to test how the EP10 reads and writes bar codes. The Demo Scanner dialog box contains buttons at the bottom of the dialog box that allow you to Scan, Reset or change bar code Setting.4.6 Office MobileThis icon contains the following abridged Microsoft programs: Excel Mobile, OneNote Mobile, PowerPoint Mobile and Word Mobile. Keep in mind that if Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu, this icon will not be displayed in the Programs window.4.6.1 Excel MobileExcel Mobile is an abridged version of Microsoft Excel, an electronic spreadsheet program. If you’re familiar the Excel application on your PC, you’ll be able to navigate Excel Mobile.In addition to providing the tools to manipulate text and numeric values like statistics, per-centages, using formulas that perform calculations, and so on, this program can also include graphics such as pie charts.Excel Mobile allows you to copy Excel workbooks from your PC onto your EP10 and update them while you’re away from your desk.• Tap on Start>Programs>Office Mobile>Excel Mobile. If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu, tap on Start>Office Mobile and then tap on Excel Mobile.• If a list of workbooks is displayed rather than a new sheet, you’ll need to create a new workbook. To create a workbook:•In Excel Mobile, tap the Menu>File>New.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsOneNote MobileEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 614.6.1.1 Workbook Components• If the toolbar is not visible, tap on the View>Toolbar.You can enter data, work with rows and columns and create formulas as you would when working with Excel on your PC.Using Excel Mobile HelpIf you need help using this application, you can review the instructions in the associated help files. To display Excel Mobile help files:• Launch the Excel Mobile program.• Tap on Start>Help, and review the instructions provided.4.6.2 OneNote MobileYou can use OneNote Mobile to take notes wherever you are and then synchronize your notes with a notebook section in the OneNote version on your PC. For example, you can:• Snap pictures of business cards on your EP10 and then bring them into OneNote on your PC.• Create short text notes and voice recordings on your EP10 to remind you about impor-tant meetings, ideas, etc. and synchronize them with your notes.• Prepare information in OneNote on your PC and then transfer it to your EP10 where it will be available to you wherever you and your EP10 go.Formula drop-down menuSheet1 drop-down menuSelected cellCellEntry barColumnsAddress of selected textRowsStatus barToolbarMenu barPreliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsOneNote Mobile62 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualSetting Up A Partnership• Start Office OneNote and ActiveSync on your PC• Connect the EP10 to your PC; you can use a USB cable or a Bluetooth connection.When a connection is established between the EP10 and your PC, ActiveSync displays a New Partnership screen.• Choose Standard partnership, and tap on Next.• To share information between OneNote Mobile and Office OneNote 2007 on your PC, tap Synchronize with this desktop computer, and then tap on Next.• Tap on Finish to begin the partnership between the EP10 and the PC. Now you’ll be able to pass notes back and forth between your PC and your EP10.Creating A Note•If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu, tap on Start>Office Mobile>OneNote Mobile icon.Important: Remember that you must have Microsoft Office OneNote 2007 and the latest version of ActiveSync installed on your PC before you can set up a partner-ship between your EP10 and your PC.ActiveSync can be installed from the Getting Started CD included with your EP10. Refer to “The Getting Started CD” on page 15 for details.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsOneNote MobileEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 63If this is not the case, tap on Start>Programs>Office Mobile icon. Tap on the OneNote Mobile icon.• Tap on New to create a note page. Begin typing.• When you complete your note, tap on Done.Note: Remember that you can tap on the Menu softkey to Undo typing, add Formats (Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikethrough), include Lists (Numbered, Bulleted, Clear)Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsOneNote Mobile64 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualUsing the OneNote MenuTapping on Menu displays a list of options to help you work with the OneNote Mobile applet.•Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy and Paste: These commands operate in the same way as they do in any Windows Office application.•Format: Tapping on this command lists the formatting options you can apply to your note: Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikethrough and Clear All. •Take Picture: When you tap on this option, the EP10 switches to camera mode so that you can snap a picture to include in your note. Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsOneNote MobileEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 65Press [ENTER/Power] to snap a photo that is automatically inserted into your note.•Insert Picture: Tapping on this command automatically displays your My Pictures folder where you can tap on an existing picture to insert it into your note.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsOneNote Mobile66 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual•Insert Recording: When you tap on this command, a recording panel is displayed. Tap on the Record button to record your message.Tap on Stop when you’ve completed your message.Tap on Play to listen to your voice message. To discard your message, tap on X – the Cancel button.To save your message, tap on OK. An audio icon is displayed in your note. You can tap on it to listen to your message.Synchronizing EP10 One Note With PC OneNote• Connect the EP10 to your PC using either a USB cable or Bluetooth.When the connection is complete, take one of the following steps:RecordStopSavePlayCancelPreliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsWord MobileEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 67•In Microsoft ActiveSync on your PC, choose Sync.orOn your EP10, tap on Start>ActiveSync, and then tap on Sync.During synchronization, the notes you created on your EP10 are copied to a new Office OneNote 2007 notebook called OneNote Mobile on your PC. When synchronization is done, you can drag the transferred notes into any other sections and other notebooks on your PC.4.6.3 Word MobileIf you’ve used Microsoft Word on your Mac or PC, Word Mobile will be familiar to you. Keep in mind however that Word Mobile is designed for a small screen and limited memory. • Tap on Start>Programs>Office Mobile>Word Mobile.If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu, tap on Start>Office Mobile and then tap on Word Mobile.If you’ve already create a Word document, it will be listed in the Word Mobile window.• Tap on New in the softkey bar to create a new Word document.Note:  If you prefer to synchronize EP10 notes automatically, you can set up ActiveSync so that synchronization is continuous or occurs on a schedule. In ActiveSync on your PC, in the Tools menu, tap Options, and then tap on the Schedule tab.Note: Keep in mind also that a Word document created on your PC can lose key format-ting features such as styles and tables if you make changes to it on your EP10.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsPowerPoint Mobile68 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualUsing Word Mobile HelpIf you need help using this application, you can review the instructions in the associated help files. To display Word Mobile help files:• Launch the Word Mobile program.• Tap on Start>Help, and review the instructions provided.4.6.3.1 Data Entry ModesIn addition to the soft keyboard, you can enter text using Block Recognizer, Letter Recog-nizer or Transcriber. Refer to “Entering Text” on page 52 for details. You can also use the EP10 keyboard for data entry.4.6.3.2 Sharing Documents with your PCDocuments created on a PC are recognized by your EP10. However, some formatting is lost when a Word document is converted to a Word Mobile document. This loss also occurs when you open a .doc file and change it on the EP10.4.6.4 PowerPoint MobilePowerPoint Mobile works just like the desktop version that may be installed on your PC. To launch this program on your EP10:• Tap on Start>Programs>Office Mobile>PowerPoint Mobile.If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu, tap on Start>Office Mobile and then tap on PowerPoint Mobile.Using PowerPoint Mobile HelpIf you need help using this application, you can review the instructions in the associated help files. To display PowerPoint help files:• Launch the PowerPoint Mobile program as described above.• Tap on Start>Help, and review the instructions provided.Important: To avoid problems, you can work on copies of .doc files. In addition, keep in mind that you can use the Terminal Services Client program to log onto a desktop PC that is also running Terminal Services, and then you can use any program on your PC, including Microsoft Word (rather than Word Mobile). Refer to “Remote Desktop Mobile” on page 80 for details.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsFile ExplorerEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 694.7 File ExplorerWindows Embedded 6.5 files are stored in folders and sub-folders that are accessible through File Explorer. You can open, save, rename, copy and paste files in the same manner as you would on any desktop PC.4.8 Getting StartedFor information about the Getting Started applet, refer to “The Getting Started Centre ??” on page 19.4.9 PTSI Imager DemoTo run a demonstration of the Teklogix Imager applet features:• Tap on Start>Programs>PTSI Imager icon.Important: Refer to “Managing Files and Folders” on page 44 for details about this program.Note: This icon is only available when an HHP 5000 imager is installed in your EP10.Important: For details about this applet, refer to Appendix D: “Teklogix Imagers Applet”.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsInternet Sharing70 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual4.10 Internet SharingThis option allows you to use your EP10 to connect your PC to the Internet. Before you can use Internet Sharing, you must make certain that you have established a data connection on your EP10.4.10.1 Creating an Internet ConnectionFollow the steps in this section only if you have not already setup an Internet connection.You’ll need the following information before you begin:From your cellular service provider: data connectivity information, access point name and PAP/CHAP security settings.From your Internet service provider (ISP) or wireless service provider: access point name and password and any additional security information.For a GPRS, 1xRTT or dialup connection:• Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab. Tap on the Connections icon.• Under My Work Network, tap Add a new modem connection.• Type a name for the connection, and choose Cellular Line (GPRS), or for 1xRTT con-nections, choose Cellular Line. Tap on Next.• Type the phone number or access point name provided by your service provider, and tap Next.• Type the credentials supplied by your service provider, and tap Finish.4.10.2 Using Internet Sharing• Make certain that your data connect is running, and that you can access the Internet from the EP10.If you are using a USB cable to connect to your PC, you will need to disable the ActiveSync USB connection.• On your PC, open the ActiveSync window, and tap on File>Connection Settings.•Disable Allow USB connection by tapping in the checkbox to the left of this option.• Connect the EP10 to your PC using Bluetooth or a USB cable.• On your EP10, tap Start>Programs>Internet Sharing.• Choose the PC Connection type – USB or Bluetooth.• Choose the network connection that the EP10 should use to connect to the Internet.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsNotesEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 71•Tap Connect. It takes approximately 30 seconds to establish a connection. (If you are prompted to turn on Bluetooth, tap Ye s .)If your are using a Bluetooth connection, execute the following steps on your PC:•Tap Start>Control Panel>Network Connections.• Right-click on Bluetooth Network Connections, and click on View Bluetooth Network Devices.• If the EP10 is listed as a Network Access Point, choose Connect. If it is not listed, choose Create a new connection and use the New Connection Wizard to add the EP10 to the list.4.11 NotesThe Notes application is an electronic notepad you can use to jot down your ideas quickly. You can enter text using the soft keyboard, the EP10 keyboard, or you can write on the screen using your stylus. You can also record a message.Notes can also be shared through e-mail and synchronization with your PC.• Tap on Start>Programs>Notes to launch this application.• If a blank Note like the sample screen here is not displayed, tap on New in the softkey bar.4.11.1 Creating a Note• Choose an entry mode for your note.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsConverting Handwritten Notes to Text72 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualTo enter text with the soft keyboard, the Transcriber, the Block or the Letter Recognizer, tap the stylus on the arrow to the right on the soft keyboard icon   to choose your text input method.To use your stylus to handwrite on the screen, tap on the pen icon  .• Compose your note using the method you’ve chosen.• Tap on OK when you’re done.Your note is automatically saved. The file name is the first line of the note if you used the keyboard–otherwise, it’s named Note1, Note2 and so on.4.11.2 Converting Handwritten Notes to TextWhen you use the pen tool, you can write notes in your own handwriting and keep them as is, if you like. You can also teach the EP10 to recognize your handwriting and convert it into printed text.To convert handwriting into text:• Tap on the pen tool   and compose a note using your stylus.• Tap on Menu>Tools>Recognize.Important: Refer to “Entering Text” on page 52 for text entry details.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsConverting Handwritten Notes to TextEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 73The text in the note is converted from handwritten to printed text.Failed ConversionsThe Recognize tool sometimes gets the conversion wrong. If some words are not converted properly:• Press and hold the stylus on the incorrectly converted word.• In the pop-up menu, choose Alternative to display a list of possible alternatives to the incorrectly converted word. Your handwritten version is displayed along the top of the menu.Figure 4.2  Incorrect ConversionsNote: To convert only a specific portion of your handwritten note into printed type, tap the stylus just before the first letter of the text, pause for a second, and then drag your stylus across the text you want to select. Then, tap on Tools>Recognize to convert only the highlighted text.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsRenaming a Note74 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap on the correct word in the list.• If the correct word is not listed, as is the case in the sample screen above, tap on the soft keyboard icon   to display the soft keyboard, and type the correct word.4.11.3 Renaming a Note• Press and hold the stylus on the file name in the Notes screen that you want to rename. In the pop-up menu, choose Rename/Move, or Tap the file name to select it, and tap on Menu>Rename/Move.•In the Name field, type the new name, and tap OK.4.11.4 Recording NotesIt’s sometimes easier to record a note than to write it down just to make certain that you’ve captured an idea before it drifts away. To make an audio recording:• Tap on New to open a fresh note.• Tap on Menu>View Recording Toolbar.• Tap on the Record button–a beep alerts you that your device is now ready to record.• Begin speaking into the microphone on the EP10, or move the EP10 to within a few feet of the source of the sound you want to record.• Tap on the Stop button when you’ve completed your recording.• Tap on OK to save the note.RecordStopPlayProgressIndicatorSkip to beginningSkip to endVolumePreliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsSynchronizing a NoteEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 75A speaker icon is displayed in the note indicating the presence of a recording within the note.• To play the recorded note, tap on the speaker icon.4.11.5 Synchronizing a NoteLike Tasks, Contacts and so on, the Notes program can be synchronized with Outlook on your PC. In this way, all notes, recordings and drawings created in the Notes program are copied to your PC and can be edited in Outlook’s Notes module.• To review the steps required to synchronize a note, with a Note page opened, tap on Start>Help. Follow the steps in the EP10 help file to synchronize your note.4.12 Pictures & VideosThe Pictures & Videos applet allows you to snap photographs and record video footage. It is also a photo and video viewing program. 4.12.1 Using the Camera• Tap on Start>Programs>Pictures & Videos.Important: The Pictures & Videos program can only display .bmp or .jpg formats. Photos in other formats will need to be converted on your PC before they are transferred to the EP10.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsUsing the Camera76 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualKeep in mind that if there are no pictures stored on your EP10 as yet, you’ll only see the Camera icon in this screen.• Tap on the Camera icon to activate the camera.The screen will display the image your camera is pointed at. (The camera is built into the back of the EP10.)• Frame the image in the EP10 screen. Press [ENTER/Power] to snap the photograph.Photo MenuWhen the camera is activated, tapping on Menu displays a set of commands to help you modify how your camera operates, the quality of the photos it takes, and so on. You can also use this menu to activate the video recorder rather than the still camera.Photo File IconIndicates the camerais active.Tapping on this softkeydisplays thumbnails ofphotos stored on the EP10.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsMoving Photos to the EP10EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 774.12.2 Moving Photos to the EP10• Connect your device to your PC with ActiveSync.• On your PC, using Windows Explorer (right-click My Computer and click on Explorer), drag photos from their folder to the Mobile Device>My Pictures folder.4.12.3 Opening a Photo• To open a photo, tap on Start>Programs>Pictures & Videos. You’ll see a thumbnail of your photos.Note: ‘Video’ is a toggle command. When the still camera is activated, ‘Video’ is available in this menu. When the video recorder is activated, ‘Still’ (camera) is available in this menu.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsDeleting a Photo78 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap on a thumbnail to open the photo.4.12.4 Deleting a Photo• Press and hold the stylus on the thumbnail photo you want to delete to display a pop-up menu. Tap on Delete.• Confirm your choice when prompted.4.12.5 Editing a Photo• Tap a thumbnail photo to open it.• Tap on Menu>Edit.The Rotate command is now displayed in the softkey bar. Additional editing tools are now listed in the Menu.4.12.6 Creating a Slide ShowTo view a slide show:• Tap on the Menu>Play Slide Show. The slide show begins–in slide show mode, photos are displayed for about five seconds, one after the other.Note: If you’ve stored your photos on a storage card, you’ll need to tap on the storage card icon to display your photos.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsUsing the Video RecorderEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 79• To display the slide show tool bar, tap anywhere on the photo.4.12.7 Using the Video Recorder• Tap on the Camera icon.Flip ViewPlayPause PreviousNextClosePreliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsRemote Desktop Mobile80 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• In the bottom-right corner of the camera screen, tap on Menu>Video.• Press [ENTER/Power] to begin recording.• To end the video, press [ENTER/Power] again, or tap on the Stop softkey.4.13 Remote Desktop MobileThis program allows you to log onto a Windows Terminal Server and run the desktop pro-grams from the server on your EP10.Video Recorder IconIndicates that videois active.Note: When the ‘Video’ recorder is activated, a Menu is available to tailor the operation of the recorder, the quality of the recording, and so on.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsConnecting to a Terminal ServerEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 814.13.1 Connecting to a Terminal Server• Tap on Start>Programs>Remote Desktop Mobile•In the Server dialog box, type the Terminal Server name or TCP/IP address, or choose a server from the drop-down menu.• Tap on Connect.•In the Remote Desktop Connection window, type your user name, password, and domain (if required). Tap on OK.4.13.2 Disconnecting without Ending a Session•In the Remote Desktop Connection window, tap on Start>Shutdown.• Tap on Disconnect>OK4.13.3 Ending a Session•In the Terminal Services Client screen, tap on Start>Shutdown.• Tap on Log Off>OK.Important: These commands are accessed from the Start menu in the Terminal Serv-ices screen used to access the PC’s commands. Do NOT use the Start menu on your EP10.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsSearch82 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual4.14 Search•Tap Start>Programs, and then tap on the Search icon.•In the Search for field, type the item for which you’re looking.• To narrow your search, tap on the Type drop-down menu and choose from a list of pre-existing programs. To search through all files, leave this option at All Data.4.15 Task ManagerRefer to “Task Manager” on page 145 for details about this applet.4.16 TasksThis program helps you stay ahead of your schedule by managing your tasks, appointments, and so on. For details about Tasks, refer to “Task Notification” on page 37.4.17 Internet ExplorerNote: Internet Explorer is available from the Start menu by default. If you prefer it only be accessed from the Programs window, tap on Start>Settings, tap on the Menus icon and uncheck Internet Explorer.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsBrowsing Web SitesEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 83You can connect to Internet Explorer in two ways: by connecting the EP10 directly to the In-ternet or by connecting through your PC while the EP10 is attached via ActiveSync (see “ActiveSync®” on page 59).4.17.1 Browsing Web SitesThere is little difference between the standard Internet Explorer found on your PC and that found on your EP10, sometimes referred to as Pocket Internet Explorer. You can enter URLs, set a ‘home page’, turn images on and off, e-mail links to friends, and so on.To go to a web site:• Connect your EP10 to the Internet. (If you’re not certain how to do this, tap on Start>Internet Explorer to display a blank window. Next, tap on Start>Help and follow the steps listed.)• Tap on Start>Programs>Internet Explorer to open Internet Explorer. If Internet Explorer is listed in the Start menu rather in the Program screen, tap on Start>Internet Explorer.• Tap on the address bar – the field near the top of the screen where URLs are entered – to highlight the current URL.• Type a new URL in the address bar.Tapping on the softkeys in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen display Internet Ex-plorer commands like those you find on your PC.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsMessaging84 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual4.18 MessagingThe Messaging program is used to send and receive e-mail on your EP10. To send and receive e-mail, you’ll need to synchronize your PC or connect to a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4) mail server.For each of these methods, you need to set up an e-mail account with one exception – Outlook e-mail accounts are set up by default.4.18.1 FoldersIf you use an Outlook e-mail account, messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are automat-ically synchronized with your EP10. You can use ActiveSync on your PC to synchronize additional folders. The folders and messages you move are mirrored on the server.For POP3 accounts, if you move e-mail messages to a folder you create, the link between the messages on the EP10 and the copies on the mail server are broken. When you next con-nect, the mail server will recognize that the messages are missing from the EP10 Inbox folder and delete them from the server, preventing duplication of messages. Keep in mind however that you will not have further access to messages that you moved to folders from anywhere except with the EP10.For IMAP4 accounts, the folders you create and the messages you move are reflected on the server, making messages available any time whether you connect to your mail server from your EP10 or your PC.4.18.2 Synchronizing E-mail with OutlookBy synchronizing the EP10 Messaging program with Outlook on your PC, your e-mail is available on both the EP10 and on your PC. Note: Messaging is available from the Start menu by default. If you prefer it only be accessed from the Programs window, tap on Start>Settings, tap on the Menus icon and uncheck Messaging.Note: Synchronizing e-mail does not require that the EP10 have an independent connec-tion to the Internet.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsSynchronizing E-mail with OutlookEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 85• In ActiveSync on your PC, tap on Tools>Options in the tool bar at the top of the screen.• Make certain that a check mark is displayed in the checkbox next to E-mail. Tap on OK.Once you check E-mail for synchronization, Outlook e-mail messages are synchronized as part of the general synchronization process. The next time you synchronize with Active-Sync, the e-mail in Outlook on your PC will be transferred to the Messaging program on your EP10.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsChanging Synchronization Settings86 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual4.18.3 Changing Synchronization Settings• In ActiveSync on your PC, double-tap the E-mail item in the Sync Options tab.• Tap on the Select Folder button.• Add a checkmark next to the folders in this screen that you want to synchronize with your EP10, and tap on OK.The E-mail Synchronization screen is displayed again.• If you want to accept file attachments, add a check mark next to Include file attach-ments. To limit the size, tap on Only if smaller than, and specify a size in the KB box.• Tap on OK.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 4: ProgramsWindows MediaEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 874.19 Windows MediaWindows Media allows you to play music and videos on your EP10. You can use Windows Media to play digital audio and video files that are stored on your EP10 or on the Web.• To work with this applet, tap on Start>Programs>Windows Media.• To find detailed instructions about this option, tap on Start>Help, and in the list of help files, tap on Use Windows Media Player Mobile.Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 89SETTINGS 55.1 Settings.........................................955.2 Personal Settings....................................955.3 App Launch Keys ...................................955.4 Buttons Icon ......................................985.4.1 Up/Down Control ..............................985.4.2 Sequence...................................995.4.3 One Shots...................................995.4.4 Keyboard Macro Keys . . . .........................1015.4.5 Unicode Mapping ..............................1025.4.6 Scancode Remapping.............................1035.4.7 Lock Sequence................................1065.5 Input ..........................................1075.5.1 Input Method Tab...............................1085.5.1.1 Word Completion..........................1125.5.2 Options–Additional Choices.........................1125.6 Lock ..........................................1135.7 Menus..........................................1145.7.1 Start Menu Tab................................1145.8 Owner Information...................................1155.9 Phone ..........................................1165.10 Sound & Notifications . ...............................1165.10.1 Sounds....................................1175.10.2 Notifications.................................1175.11 Today Screen.....................................1185.11.1 Appearance.................................1185.11.2 Items.....................................1185.12 System Tab Settings..................................1195.13 About .........................................119Preliminary Draft
90 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.14 About Device.....................................1205.15 Backlight.......................................1205.15.1 Battery Power...............................1205.15.2 External Power...............................1215.15.3 Intensity..................................1215.16 Certificates......................................1225.16.1 Choosing a Certificate . ..........................1245.17 Clock & Alarms...................................1245.18 Customer Feedback .................................1245.19 Encryption......................................1255.20 Error Reporting....................................1265.21 GPS (Global Positioning System)..........................1275.22 GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings.....................1285.23 Manage Triggers...................................1335.23.1 Trigger Mappings.............................1345.23.1.1 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping..................1355.24 Managed Programs..................................1375.25 Memory .......................................1375.25.1 Main Tab..................................1385.25.2 Storage Card................................1385.26 Power Icon......................................1385.26.1 Battery Tab.................................1395.26.2 Advanced Tab...............................1395.26.3 Battery Details...............................1405.26.4 Built-In Devices..............................1415.26.5 Card Slots .................................1415.26.6 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup............1425.26.7 Suspend Mode...............................1435.27 Regional Settings...................................1435.28 Remove Programs..................................1445.29 Screen Icon......................................1445.30 Task Manager ....................................145Preliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 915.31 Teklogix Error Handling Service...........................1475.31.1 ErrorLogInfo................................1475.31.2 NetLog ...................................1485.32 Teklogix Imagers Settings...............................1495.33 Scanner Settings....................................1505.33.1 Bar Code Settings – The Scanner Menu..................1515.33.2 Options Tab.................................1525.33.2.1 Double Click Parameters .....................1525.33.2.2 Display Parameters ........................1535.33.2.3 Data Handling...........................1545.33.3 Translations Tab...............................1545.33.3.1 Case Rules.............................1565.33.4 Ports Tab ..................................1575.33.4.1 Port Replicator Port A (COM5:)..................1585.34 Total Recall . .....................................1605.34.1 Creating a Backup Profile. .........................1615.34.2 Restoring a Profile .............................1645.35 TweakIT........................................1645.35.1 Advanced Interface And Network.....................1655.35.2 Advanced Services Settings.........................1665.35.3 Radio Features ...............................1675.35.4 User System Setting.............................1685.35.5 Registry Editor...............................1695.36 Windows Update ...................................1695.37 Connections Tab....................................1695.37.1 Navigation Bar Hotkeys ..........................1705.38 Beam .........................................1725.39 Bluetooth Setup....................................1725.39.1 The Devices Tab ..............................1735.39.1.1 Pairing a Device..........................1755.39.2 Bluetooth Mode...............................1765.39.3 Bluetooth COM Ports............................1775.39.4 Outgoing Port................................1785.39.5 Services...................................1785.39.6 Active Connections.............................179Preliminary Draft
92 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.39.7 About Tab . ................................1805.39.8 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone ........................1805.40 Connection Properties................................1825.40.1 Port Settings................................1835.40.2 Call Options................................1845.41 Connections – Connecting to the Internet . . ....................1845.41.1 Modem Connection Setup.........................1855.41.1.1 Advanced Modem Settings....................1885.42 Wireless Manager Icon................................1895.42.1 Flight Mode – Disabling Wireless Components..............1895.42.2 Setting Up a Network Card ........................1905.42.3 Network Adaptor Cards..........................1905.42.4 Changing Network Card Settings.....................1925.42.5 VPN Connection Setup ..........................1925.42.6 Managing an Existing Connection.....................1935.42.6.1 Editing a Connection . . . ....................1935.42.6.2 Changing a Connection Setting Name..............1935.42.7 Selecting a Network............................1945.42.8 Proxy Server Setup.............................1955.42.8.1 Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings ...........1965.43 Wireless Statistics..................................1975.44 Wireless WAN....................................1975.44.1 Softkey Bar Icons.............................1975.44.2 Establishing a Connection.........................1985.44.3 Disconnecting from a Network . . ....................1995.44.3.1 Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User Interface........1995.44.4 Advanced Information...........................1995.44.4.1 Entering a PIN ..........................1995.44.4.2 Error States............................2005.44.5 Tools Menu.................................2015.44.5.1 Data Connection Configuration..................2015.44.5.2 Security Configuration......................2055.44.5.3 Network Configuration......................2065.44.5.4 Driver Mode Configuration....................2075.44.5.5 Modem Information .......................2075.44.6 SMS Menu.................................2095.44.6.1 New SMS.............................210Preliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 935.44.6.2 Inbox . ...............................2105.44.6.3 Outbox...............................2115.44.6.4 SMS Configuration ........................2125.45 Windows Update ...................................213Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsSettingsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 955.1 SettingsThe Settings screen is divided into three tabs – Personal, System and Connections.• Tap on Start>Settings to display this screen.Figure 5.1  Settings Tabs5.2 Personal SettingsThe Personal tab allows you to tailor the general behaviour of your EP10 such as defining input methods, Start menu options, owner information, password assignment, sound specifi-cations, and so on.5.3 App Launch KeysThe App Launch Keys icon allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then launch the application from a single key-press.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsApp Launch Keys96 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the App Launch Keys icon.To assign an application key:• Tap the Add button.• Press the key you want to use to launch an application. (If an unsupported key is pressed, a message appears on this screen letting you know.)Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsApp Launch KeysEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 97The cursor moves to the App field and a new screen is displayed where you can choose the application to which you want to assign the application key. If you need to, you can Browse through the information in your EP10 until you locate the application you want to launch. • Once you’ve selected the file you want to map, tap on OK.The cursor moves to the Data field. You can use this field if you need to define special pa-rameters to your application launch key. If you don’t want to assign any parameters, you can leave the Data field blank. If, for example, you want to assign an application launch key to launch the Word Mobile application, you can leave this field blank. If you want to assign an application launch key that will open a specific document in the Word Mobile application, you need to browse to and choose that document while the cursor is in the Data field.• Tap on OK.• If you need to Edit, Remove or Add another App Launch Key, you can do it from this final screen. Otherwise, tap on OK to save you Application Launch Key.• To launch the application you chose, press the application key you assigned.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsButtons Icon98 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.4 Buttons Icon• Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Buttons icon to display your options.5.4.1 Up/Down ControlSliding the Delay before first repeat bar to the left decreases the delay between key repeats while sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat delay time.Sliding the Repeat rate bar to the left slows the rate at which an [Up/Down] button repeats when pressed. Sliding the bar to the right increases the key repeat rate.Note: The ‘Program Buttons’ option is not available on the EP10.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsSequenceEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 995.4.2 Sequence This slider determines the allowable pause between alpha key presses on a keypad. For example, suppose you want to type the letter ‘c’ – you would need to press the [2] key three times. With the [ORANGE] key locked ‘on’, if you press [2] twice and then pause between key presses for 1 second, the letter ‘b’ will be selected automatically. Moving the Sequence slider to the right increases the pause time between alpha key presses.5.4.3 One ShotsThe options in this tab allows you to determine how modifier keys on your EP10 behave. For each modifier key – [ALT], [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ORANGE] and [BLUE] – you have the following options in the drop-down menu: Lock, OneShot, and OneShot/Lock.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsOne Shots100 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualLockIf you choose Lock from the drop-down menu, pressing a modifier key once locks it ‘on’ until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off. OneShotIf you choose OneShot, the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed.OneShot/LockOneShot/Lock allows you to combine these functions. If you choose this option and press the modifier key once, it remains active only until the next key is pressed. If you choose OneShot/Lock and then press the modifier key twice, it is locked ‘on’, remain-ing active until the modifier key is pressed a third time to turn it ‘off’.Show Modifier Key StateWhen you enable Show modifier key state, a shift-state indicator icon  replaces the soft keyboard icon in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen. When a modifier key is pressed, a square in this icon is highlighted. A ‘locked’ modifier key is displayed in the shift-state in-dicator icon with a black frame around it.Important: Once you’ve assigned a One Shot mode to a modifier key, you need to tap on the OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsKeyboard Macro KeysEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1015.4.4 Keyboard Macro KeysMacro keys are not labelled on the keypad. However, you can map up to 12 macro functions using the keyboard remapping function described in “Scancode Remapping” on page 103. A macro has 20 programmable characters (or “positions”). The macro keys can be pro-grammed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys including [ENTER/Power] and [BKSP], function keys, and arrow keys.Recording and Saving a Macro•In the Macro menu, highlight a macro key number–for example, macro 1 to assign a macro to macro key [M1]. Tap on the Record button. A Record Macro screen is displayed.• Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key. You can type text and numbers, and you can program the function of special keys into a macro.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsUnicode Mapping102 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• When you’ve finished recording your macro sequence, tap on Stop Recording. A new screen – Verify Macro – displays the macro sequence you created. • Tap on the Save button to save your macro. Your macro key sequence is listed in the Macro screen. • Tap on OK to save your macro key assignment.Executing a Macro• Press the macro key to which you’ve assigned the macro to execute it.Deleting a Macro•In the Macros tab, highlight the macro number you want to delete.• Tap on the Delete button.5.4.5 Unicode Mapping• Tap on the Unicode Mapping tab to display this screen.The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and [CTRL] and [SHIFT] states to Unicode™ values. This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value. For example, “a (U+0061)” indicates that the character “a” is represented by the Unicode value “0061”, and so on. Keep in mind that Unicode configura-tions are represented as hexidecimal rather than decimal values.All user-defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual key value, and then by order of the shift state. If a Unicode mapping is not listed, the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsScancode RemappingEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 103Adding and Changing Unicode Values• Tap on the Add/Change button.• Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list.• Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field, and type a Unicode value for the highlighted key.Removing Unicode Values•In the Unicode Mapping tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and tap the Remove button.5.4.6 Scancode RemappingA scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard. Every key has a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key, a function or a macro. Scancode Remap-ping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard. A key can be remapped to send a virtual key (e.g. VK_F represents the ‘F’ key; VK_RETURN represents the [ENTER/Power] key, etc.), perform a function (e.g. turn the scanner on, change vol-ume/contrast, etc.) or run a macro.Important: Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Unicode Mapping tab by tapping on [OK].Note: To add a shifted state – [SHIFT] and/or [CTRL], tap on the checkbox next to ‘SHIFT Pressed’ and/or ‘CTRL Pressed’.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsScancode Remapping104 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualThere are three different tables of scancode mappings: the Normal table, the Blue table and the Orange table. The Normal table defines unmodified key presses; the Blue table defines key presses that occur when the [BLUE] modifier is on; the Orange table defines key presses that occur when the [ORANGE] modifier is on. The default mappings of these scan-codes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using the Scancode Remapping tab.The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the Scancodes in hexidecimal. If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key, that virtual key is displayed in the next column labelled ‘V-Key’. A virtual key that is ‘Shifted’ or ‘Unshifted’ is displayed in the third column labelled ‘Function’. If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro, the first and second columns remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number (e.g., Macro 2).Adding a RemapTo add a new remapping:• Tap the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsScancode RemappingEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 105The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed.• Type the scan code in hexidecimal in the field labelled Scancode.Virtual Key, Function and MacroThe radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scan code will be remapped to: Virtual Key, Function or Macro. When Virtual Key is selected, you can choose to force [SHIFT] to be on or off when the virtual key is sent. If No Force is selected, the shift state is dependent on whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent.When Function is selected, a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box. When Macro is selected, the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box.• Choose Virtual Key>Function or Macro.• Choose a function from the Function list, and tap on OK.Editing a Scancode Remap•In the Scancode Remapping tab, tap on the remap you want to edit.• Tap on the Edit button, and make the appropriate changes.• Tap on OK to save your changes.Note: The ‘Label’ field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsLock Sequence106 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualRemoving a Remap•In the Scancode Remapping tab, highlight the scancode you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.• Tap on OK.5.4.7 Lock SequenceThe Lock Sequence tab allows you to lock the EP10 keyboard to prevent keys from being pressed accidentally when, for example, the unit is inserted in a holster.• To lock the keyboard, tap in the checkbox next to Enable key lock sequence.• If you want the keyboard to be locked at startup, tap in the checkbox next to Keyboard locked at startup. Otherwise, leave this option disabled.•In the Key sequence drop-down menu, choose the key sequence you will use to lock and unlock the keyboard.• Tap on OK.•To lock the keyboard, type the key sequence you chose – for example, Orange-Blue-0.Note: It is useful to leave the ‘Show popup message’ enabled (default) so that anyone attempting to use the EP10 keyboard will see the key sequence they will need to enter to unlock the keyboard displayed on the screen.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsInputEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 107A locked keyboard icon is displayed in the softkey bar when the keyboard is locked.•To unlock the keyboard, type the key sequence again.5.5 InputThe Input icon provides access to text input options you can use to tailor the soft keyboard, block recognizer, letter recognizer and transcriber along with voice recording options.Locked KeyboardIconPreliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsInput Method Tab108 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.5.1 Input Method Tab• Tap on Start>Settings and then on the Input icon to display your options.A drop-down menu next to Input method allows you to tailor your methods of input – Block Recognizer, Keyboard, Letter Recognizer and Transcriber.Block RecognizerBlock Recognizer teaches you how to conform your handwriting to what the EP10 can recognize. Important: Refer to “Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer” on page 54 for addi-tional details.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsInput Method TabEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 109Keyboard OptionsThis screen is displayed when you choose Keyboard in the Input method drop-down menu. You can use it to customize the soft keyboard. You can choose Large Keys or Small Keys to increase or decrease the size of the keys displayed on the soft keyboard. If you enable Use gestures for the following keys, these keys are removed from the soft key-board. Gestures are handwriting shortcuts for the keyboard keys. Before you can enable this option, you’ll need to tap on the radio button to the left of Large keys.Letter Recognizer OptionsLetter Recognizer teaches you how to conform your handwriting to what the EP10 can recognize. To display additional letter recognition options, tap on the Options button in the Letter Rec-ognizer screen.Important: Refer to “Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer” on page 54 for addi-tional details.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsInput Method Tab110 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualFigure 5.2  Letter Recognizer Quick SettingsThese options allow the Letter Recognizer to better interpret any specialized strokes and accents you may wish to use.Transcriber OptionsWhen you choose Transcriber as the input method, three tabs of options are available to you – Quick Settings, Inking and Advanced.Quick SettingsThe Quick Settings tab allows you choose the writing direction–the icons indicate direction. In addition, you can choose to enable or disable the display of the Introductory screen and the sound each time you launch the Transcriber.Note: Before you can display the Options for Transcriber, you need to select Transcriber as the active input method. Tap on the arrow to the right of the keyboard icon in the taskbar, and choose Transcriber.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsInput Method TabEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 111InkingIn the Inking tab, you are presented with a number of options. Recognition Delay allows you to determine the time delay between writing something on the Transcriber screen and its recognition into printed text. Enabling Add space after automatically adds a space after each word you write. The Pen option allows you to choose the line Width and Colour. Finally, tapping on Match Letter Shapes to your writing displays a screen in which you can learn how to form letters to help the EP10 to recognize the most often used characters.AdvancedIn this tab, Shorthand allows you to create a shortened word that the Transcriber will recog-nize and expand into a complete word automatically. You can also insert data such as a date or run a program.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsOptions–Additional Choices112 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.5.1.1 Word CompletionThis tab speeds the writing process regardless of the input method chosen. When you begin entering a word, this option displays what it assumes is the complete word, saving you having to type the word in its entirety. You can also tailor how and when you want word sug-gestions made.5.5.2 Options–Additional ChoicesThis tab offers a few choices including choosing a voice recording format, zoom percentage for writing and typing, automatic capitalization of the first letter in a sentence and automatic scrolling when you’ve reached the bottom of the screen.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsLockEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1135.6 LockTo protect the data stored in your EP10, you can assign a password that must be entered each time the unit is switched on.• Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Lock icon.It is critical that you store your password in a safe place. If you forget it, a ‘clean start’ must be performed by certified Psion Teklogix personnel. A clean start returns the EP10 to factory settings. Only the data stored in a CF or SD memory card are preserved.• Tap in the checkbox next to Prompt if device unused to turn on password protection. • Choose the amount of time that the unit can remain idle before you are prompted to enter your password.•In the Password type drop-down menu, choose the type of password you prefer to assign. Simple PIN allows you to enter a minimum of four numeric characters. Strong alphanumeric requires a minimum of 7 characters and must contain at least three of the following: uppercase and lowercase alpha characters, numbers and punctuation.• Tap on the Hint tab to enter a word or phrase that will remind you of your password. The EP10 will display the hint after the wrong password is entered five times.• Tap on OK. A dialog box asks whether or not you want to save you password settings. Tap on YES to save your password assignment.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsMenus114 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.7 MenusThe Menus icon allows you to display options to customise the Start Menu. • Tap on Start>Settings and then tap on the Menus icon.5.7.1 Start Menu TabThis tab allows you to define the items that will be listed in your Start menu.•In the Start Menu dialog box, tap on the items you want to appear in your Start menu. The checked items will be listed in your Start menu.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsOwner InformationEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1155.8 Owner InformationTapping on Start>Settings and then tapping on the Owner Information icon allows you to add your personal information to the EP10. Some of this information will be displayed in the desktop Today screen.Important: Refer to “Ownership Information” on page 36 for details about this option.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsPhone116 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.9 Phone Tapping on Start>Settings and then tapping on the Phone icon allows you to adjust phone settings such as the ring type and tone, choose phone services such as barring calls, and you can also determine network selections.5.10 Sound & NotificationsThe Sounds & Notifications icon allows you to specify when your EP10 will emit sounds.Important: Refer to “Managing Phone Settings” on page 39 for details about this option.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsSoundsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1175.10.1 Sounds• Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Sounds & Notifications icon to display this dialog box.• Tap in the checkboxes and radio buttons to enable the event(s) that will cause your unit to emit a sound.5.10.2 NotificationsThis tab allows you to determine how you are notified about different events.• Choose an event from the Events drop-down menu.• Choose the Ring type and Ring tone. Tap on the arrow below Ring tone to test your choices. The small square button stops the ring test.Tap here to play your ring choicesTa p  h e r e  t o  e n d the ring testPreliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsToda y  Sc re en118 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.11 Today ScreenThis option allows you to tailor the appearance of the Today screen – the desktop screen.• Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Today icon.5.11.1 AppearanceThis screen allows you to customize the background displayed on the Today screen.• Choose the background you want to use from the list.5.11.2 ItemsThis tab allows you to choose and to sort the item(s) that you want listed in the Today screen.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsSystem Tab SettingsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 119• Tap in the checkbox to the left of the item(s) you want displayed in the Today screen.• To rearrange the list of items, highlight the item you want to move up or down and tap on the Move Up or Move Down button. Keep in mind that the Date cannot be moved.5.12 System Tab SettingsTo display the icons grouped in the System tab:• Tap on Start>Settings, and tap on the System tab.5.13 AboutTapping on Start>Settings>System tab, and then the About icon displays a grouping of tabs that provide device information.Version TabThis tab outlines the Windows Embedded 6.5 version, processor information, memory size and a description of the expansion card, if one is in use.Device ID TabThis tab provides fields in which you can assign a Device name and Description (optional) for the EP10. This name is used by the EP10 to identify itself to other devices. Keep in mind that this must be a unique name across a network. If you are unable to connect to a network because another device with the same name is already connected, you’ll need to assign a new name here.CopyrightsThe Copyright tab lists the copyright information for the software loaded on your EP10.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsAbout Device120 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.14 About DeviceTapping on the About Device icon under Settings>System tab provides access to three tabs related to your EP10. The Properties tab lists hardware information related to your EP10. The Copyrights tab lists the copyrights that apply to your EP10. The Experience tab allows you to choose a category to help you define your Experience. These categories include Mi-crosoft settings, Psion Teklogix settings and Custom settings in a drop-down menu. Each category contains a group of default settings. If you change a default setting, the category is automatically changed to Custom settings.5.15 Backlight• Tap on Start>Settings, then tap on the System tab. Tap on the Backlight icon.Tapping on the Backlight icon allows you to determine the power properties of the EP10. 5.15.1 Battery PowerThis tab allows you to tailor the EP10 backlight behaviour to best preserve battery life.• To define how long the backlight should stay on when the EP10 is not in use, tap in the checkbox to the left of Turn off backlight if device is not used for.• Tap on the drop-down menu, and choose the number of seconds or minutes the back-light will remain on when the EP10 is idle.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsExternal PowerEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 121•To Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped, tap in the checkbox to the left of this option.5.15.2 External PowerThis tab determines the behaviour of the backlight when the EP10 is using external rather than battery power. 5.15.3 IntensityThis tab is used to adjust the light intensity of the display backlight and the keyboard back-light. Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity, and sliding it to the right raises the intensity.Important: Refer to “Battery Power” on page 120 for details about these options.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsCertificates122 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.16 CertificatesA public key is transmitted as part of a certificate. The certificates listed in the Certificates tabs ensure that the submitted public key is, in fact, the public key that belongs to the sub-mitter. The EP10 checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that the EP10 explicitly trusts.Your EP10 has certificates already preinstalled in the unit. Personal certificates establish your identity, Intermediate certificates, as the name suggests, identifies intermediate certifi-cation authorities and Root certificates establish the identity of the servers with which you can connect.• Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab.• Tap on the Certificates icon.Personal TabThe Personal tab lists the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date. • To view additional information about a personal certificate, tap on a certificate in the list.• To delete a certificate, tap and hold the stylus on the item you want to delete until a pop-up menu is displayed. Tap on the Delete command.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsCertificatesEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 123Intermediate CertificatesThe items in this list help identify intermediate certification authorities.Root Certificates• To view details about a certificate – who issued the certificate, to whom it was issued, the issue date and the expiry date – tap on a certificate in the list.• To delete a certificate, tap and hold the stylus on the certificate you want to delete. • In the pop-up menu, tap on the Delete command.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsChoosing a Certificate124 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.16.1 Choosing a CertificateNormally, certificates already configured for your network are chosen automatically by the EP10. If a certificate cannot be chosen automatically, you must choose it from the Certifi-cates list.• To choose a certificate, tap the desired certificate. Your EP10 will connect automatically.5.17 Clock & AlarmsLocated under Start>Settings>System tab, the Clock & Alarm icon allows you to set the current date and time, and it allows you to define up to three alarms.5.18 Customer FeedbackThis option allows Microsoft to track how you use your EP10 so that they can make im-provements to the software. The radio buttons allow you to turn this feature on or off.Important: Refer to “Today’s Date, Clock and Alarm” on page 34 for details about setting up these options.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsEncryptionEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1255.19 EncryptionThis option allows you to encrypt the data on your storage card.Note: If you want to make this option inaccessible, go to Start>Settings and tap on the About Device icon. In the Experience tab, remove the checkmark to the left of Enable Customer Feedback and SQM (reset required). As indi-cated, you’ll need to reset the EP10. Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsError Reporting126 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>Encryption icon.5.20 Error ReportingError Reporting allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.• Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab followed by the Error Reporting icon.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsGPS (Global Positioning System)EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1275.21 GPS (Global Positioning System)With a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver, you can locate your exact position on a map. However, even without a GPS receiver, several different mapping programs can run on your EP10. • Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>GPS icon.• Tap on the GPS program port drop-down menu, and choose the communication (COM) port that the GPS software will use to communicate with the GPS receiver.Note: Your EP10 may automatically detect the GPS receiver that you are using and enter the settings in the Hardware tab. If not, you’ll need to enter this information your-self. You can find this information in the user manual of the GPS receiver.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsGPS (Global Positioning System) Settings128 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap on the Hardware tab, and choose a GPS hardware port and the appropriate Baud rate.Windows Embedded 6.5 automatically manages access to the GPS receiver. However, some programs may not work with automatic configuration. If this is the case:• Tap on the Access tab, and disable Manage GPS automatically (recommended).You can go to www.microsoft.com/pocketstreets if a map-viewing program is not included with your EP10, and copy the file to your EP10.5.22 GPS (Global Positioning System) SettingsThis applet allows you to define how the GPS module operates. You can determine when the GPS module can draw power and under what conditions, and choose from a set of GPS pro-files built into the modem. You can also set up AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System).Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsGPS (Global Positioning System) SettingsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 129• Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>GPS Settings icon.Power TabThis tab allows you to dictate how the GPS module behaves. The GPS Power drop-down menu is used to control when the GPS is powered on and off.•Off – the GPS module is left off, always.• Always on – the GPS module is powered on at all times regardless of the power state of the EP10 (suspend or standby).•On, and off in suspend – the GPS module is powered on, but if the EP10 is in suspend mode, the GPS module is turned off.•On, and low power in suspend – the GPS module remains in a low-power state while the EP10 is in suspend mode.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsGPS (Global Positioning System) Settings130 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualProfiles TabTapping on the GPS Profile Selection drop-down menu allows you to choose an appropriate profile: Default, Automotive or Pedestrian. •Default profile is a good general profile suitable for most uses.•Automotive profile is designed for in-vehicle use, providing quick location updates as the vehicle moves. When the GPS module is set to this profile and the vehicle enters an area such as a tunnel where satellite coverage is interrupted, it will attempt to predict the vehicle position. •Pedestrian profile is designed for those using the GPS module while walking. It takes into account the slower pace of the pedestrian when mapping the location of the user. When the GPS module is set to this profile and the operator moves into an area where satellite coverage is interrupted, the GPS module will not attempt to predict the opera-tor’s movement.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsGPS (Global Positioning System) SettingsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 131AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System) TabTo determine your location, a GPS module receives data from three or more GPS satellites in fixed orbit around the Earth. The GPS module triangulates your location based on the time it takes for signals to get to and from the satellites. This works well in fairly clear areas – outdoors, for example. However, if you’re attempting to triangulate your location in city centres where signals bounce off tall concrete buildings or from within a building, the GPS module will have greater difficulty calculating a fix.AGPS reduces Time To First Fix (TTFF) and increases the likelihood of finding and keeping a fix in poor coverage areas such as indoor sites. AGPS downloads satellite ephemeris (or-bital) data to the EP10 periodically through WiFi or WWAN. The downloaded data is used by the GPS module to speed the process of getting a fix.Update• Click on the Update button to download Extended Ephemeris (EE) files from a secure host on the internet using any interface that has an internet connection (WWAN or WiFi). These files contain several days worth of ephemeris (orbital) data that can be used if the satellite’s broadcast ephemeris is not available.The Status field above the Update button displays the progress of the download, and once successfully downloaded, the Status field will read Idle.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsGPS (Global Positioning System) Settings132 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualSettings•Click on the Settings button to define the AGPS server connection settings.The AGPS server connection settings drop-down menu allows you to choose from two set-tings: Use default settings and Use custom settings. The Use default settings option is generally acceptable for most applications. Note that aside from the Update field in which you can choose how long the fix is stored in your EP10, the field values cannot be edited.The Use custom settings option is generally used to configure devices that will have access only to an intranet rather than the Internet and should only be altered with the assistance of qualified Psion Teklogix personnel. They will be able to help you configure your Psion Tek-logix device(s) and web server to retrieve the ephemeris data.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsManage TriggersEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 133Info TabThis tab provides general information about the GPS module such as the firmware version, the date on which files were last updated, and so on. If GPS module support service is re-quired, you may be asked to tap on the Save button in this tab and forward the information to Psion Teklogix support staff. 5.23 Manage TriggersManage Triggers allows you to configure how bar code scanners and other devices are trig-gered. You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single- and double-click, and the double-click time.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTrigger Mappings134 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>Manage Triggers icon.5.23.1 Trigger MappingsA trigger mapping is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver or application, the module(s) – sometimes referred to as “trigger consumer(s)” – of the trigger source. Along with keyboard keys, trigger sources can also be grip triggers, external hard-ware triggers or software-based. When the specified key is pressed, the trigger consumer (for example, a decoded scanner) is sent a message.Double-ClickWhen a key is pressed and released, then pressed again within the configured time (between 0 to 1000 milliseconds), a double-click occurs. See also “Trigger Press Type” on page 136.Important: It is not possible to have two or more identical mappings — for example [F1] cannot be mapped to the Non-Decoded Scanner twice — even if the trigger type is different.A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate key data or perform its normal function. For example, if the space button is used as a trigger source, it will not be able to send space characters to applications.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTrigger MappingsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 135Show All ModulesBy default, the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings. Mappings for drivers or applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed. By checking this checkbox, all mappings, both active and inactive, are displayed.AddTapping this button brings up the Add mapping dialog (see below), so that you can add new trigger mappings.EditTapping this button brings up the Edit mapping dialog, so that you can edit existing trigger mappings.RemoveTapping this button removes an existing mapping.OKThe OK button in the top right of the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes made. If the [ESC] key is pressed, all changes are discarded.5.23.1.1 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping• Tap on Add to add a new trigger map, or tap on Edit to edit an existing trigger map.Trigg er KeyThis drop-down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events, such as the Grip Trigger, Left Scan, etc., for the trigger module selected.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTrigger Mappings136 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAdd KeyOnly existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo-box. To add a new source to this list, tap on the Add Key button. A dialog box pops up, allowing you to select the key-board key to use as a trigger source.Trigger Press TypeYou can enable either an Up/Down or Double Click response to a trigger press. Normally, when a trigger (keyboard key, etc.) is pressed and released, a “trigger down” event is sent to the “owner” – that is, the application receiving the trigger press information – followed by a “trigger up”. If Double Click is chosen in this menu, when the trigger is pressed, released, and then pressed again, a “double-click” event will occur. If a mapping with the Up/down type has also been configured for the same source, it will only receive the first set of trigger events.Module to TriggerThis identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses.Show All ModulesBy default, inactive owners are not shown. By checking this checkbox, all owners, both active and inactive, are displayed.Note: It is possible to map the same source to different modules (trigger consumers) – for example, to both the Imager and Non-Decoded Scanner. If so, both devices/opera-tions will occur simultaneously. This is not recommended in most cases, especially with devices such as Imagers.It is also possible to map different sources to the same module (trigger consumer).Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsManaged ProgramsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1375.24 Managed ProgramsManaged Programs lets you view, download and install applications that are deployed by the System Center Mobile Device Manager (a server-side solution that helps enable IT to have control of their device deployment with respect to security, management and access to the corporate network). To access Managed Program:• Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>Managed Programs icon.5.25 MemoryThis applet allows you to view memory use and storage card memory allocation. To display the options for this applet:• Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab followed by the Memory icon.Note: Your system administrator can provide the details you’ll need to use Managed Pro-grams effectively.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsMain Tab138 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.25.1 Main TabThis tab lists the memory allocated for file and data storage and for program storage.5.25.2 Storage CardThe Storage Card screen indicates the total storage card or RAM disk memory along with the amount in use.5.26 Power IconThis icon allows you to view and manage battery use.• Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab followed by the Power icon.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsBattery TabEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1395.26.1 Battery TabThis tab allows you to view the remaining battery capacity.5.26.2 Advanced TabThe Advanced tab allows you to manage battery consumption.On Battery PowerWhen the EP10 is operating on battery power, this option allows you to determine how long the unit will remain on when it is not in use.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsBattery Details140 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap in the checkbox to the left of On battery power to enable this option. Tap in the drop-down menu to choose the number of minutes your unit can remain idle before it shuts down.On External PowerWhen the EP10 is drawing external rather than battery power, this option allows you to de-termine the number of minutes the unit will remain on when not in use. • Tap in the checkbox to the left of On external power to enable this option. Tap in the drop-down menu to choose the number of minutes your unit can remain idle before it shuts down.5.26.3 Battery DetailsThis tab lists the specifications and battery capacity status of the battery installed in the EP10. This is a view-only screen.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsBuilt-In DevicesEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1415.26.4 Built-In DevicesBuilt-In Devices Checking the box next to Enable Bluetooth switches on the built-in Bluetooth radio.5.26.5  Card SlotsWhen you select one or more of the card slots listed, power is supplied to the enabled slot(s). Clicking on the Apply button activates your selections. Keep in mind that if the characters on this button appear in grey typeface, the checked slots have already been enabled.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsSuspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup142 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.26.6 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery BackupThe Estimated Battery Backup is the amount of battery power that has been reserved or set aside to protect data until a fully charged battery can be installed in the EP10. When the battery capacity is depleted up to the Estimated Battery Backup reserve specified in the Suspend Threshold tab, the EP10 shuts off automatically and uses the reserve power to pre-serve the data stored on the EP10. Once the EP10 shuts down, it cannot be switched on until a fresh battery is installed, or the unit is inserted in a docking station or cradle.•Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the right to increase the battery capacity reserved for backup purposes. Data will be preserved to a maximum of 124 hours.•Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the left to decrease the power reserved for backup purposes; this increases the EP10’s operating time – the amount of time the EP10 will operate before shutting down – but reduces the power reserved for backup purposes to a minimum of 24 hours. Internal super-capacitors will protect the data stored in the EP10 while the depleted battery is swapped for a fully charged one. Important: Once the battery is removed, the super-capacitors will preserve the data stored on the EP10 for approximately 5 minutes. It is critical that you install a charged battery before this time elapses.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsSuspend ModeEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1435.26.7 Suspend ModeWhen this option is enabled, any time the EP10 enters suspend mode (e.g., an idle time out, Power button press or through the Start menu), Go to standby on suspend forces the EP10 to enter Standby mode. In Standby mode, applications, processors and services (e.g., Blue-tooth) continue to run even while the EP10 is powered down, making them instantly available when the unit is powered up again. 5.27 Regional SettingsTo display the Regional Settings screen, tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab followed by the Regional Settings icon.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsRemove Programs144 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap on the drop-down menu to choose your language and region.Once you’ve selected a language and region, you may need to adjust the way numbers, cur-rency, the time and the date appear in your EP10.• Tap on the tab associated with each of the items and choose how each item should be displayed on your EP10.5.28 Remove Programs• Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab followed by the Remove Program icon.Tapping on the Remove Programs icon displays a screen listing the programs that can be removed from your unit. • To remove a program, highlight it and then tap on the Remove button.5.29 Screen IconThis icon allows you to align (calibrate) your touchscreen, turn ClearType on and off and adjust the size of the text displayed on the EP10 screen.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTask ManagerEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 145•Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab, and then tap on the Screen icon.5.30 Task ManagerThe Task Manager screen lists all running tasks (applications) or processes. This applet pro-vides a number of options to manage these.Important: Refer to “Aligning (Calibrating) the Touchscreen” on page 20 for details.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTask Manager146 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab and then the Task M a nager icon – the Task Manager screen is opened.•End Task: To shut down an application, highlight the program in the list, and tap on the End Task softkey in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen.Task Manager MenuThe Task Manager menu provides additional options to help you manage your applications.• Tap on the Menu softkey in the taskbar.•Switch To: Makes the highlighted application active.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTeklogix Error Handling ServiceEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 147•End All Tasks: Shuts down all applications listed. •View: Allows you to list either all running applications or all processes.•Sort By: Allows you to sort active applications or processes based on Memory size, CPU or application or process Name.•Refresh: Updates the list of applications or processes.•Exit: Closes the Task Manager.5.31 Teklogix Error Handling Service• Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab followed by the Teklogix Error Han-dling Service icon.Teklogix Error Handling Service is an error diagnostic tool. Tapping in the checkbox next to Enable error reporting enables this service.5.31.1 ErrorLogInfo• To log an error, tap on the ErrorLogInfo tab.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsNetLog148 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Choose an Error Level, and tap on FlushToFile to log the information file.Psion Teklogix personnel can help you retrieve and forward the information file to our offices.5.31.2 NetLogThe NetLog option is used to log network traffic. When you tap in the checkbox to the left of Enable NetLog Debug Capturing, debug data is collected so that, if necessary, it can be for-warded to a Psion Teklogix technician for evaluation. You can also define where you want the data stored and the maximum size of the file. Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTeklogix Imagers SettingsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1495.32 Teklogix Imagers SettingsThe Teklogix Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete and activate imager settings. The principle uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture images. To launch this applet:• Tap on Start>Settings>System tab, and then tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon.A PTSI Imager demo applet is also provided to illustrate how the imager works.Note: This icon is only when displayed when the HHP 5000 imager is installed in your EP10 hand-held.Important: Refer to Appendix D: “Teklogix Imagers Applet” for details about this applet. Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsScanner Settings150 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualTo launch the demo:• Tap on Start>Programs, and then tap on the PTSI Imager icon.5.33 Scanner SettingsThe Teklogix Scanners icon in the Settings menu provides access to dialog boxes in which you can tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsBar Code Settings – The Scanner MenuEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 151• Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab followed by the Tek lo gix Scanner icon.5.33.1 Bar Code Settings – The Scanner MenuThe drop-down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose from one of the following scanner types used with your EP10: Decoded (internal), Decoded (Intermec ISCP) or Imager.The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes it supports. Important:  Appendix C: “Bar Codes Settings” provides descriptions of the bar codes listed in the scanner menus.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsOptions Tab152 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.33.2 Options TabThis tab allows you to tailor the double-click parameters and the display options associated with your scanner.5.33.2.1 Double Click ParametersClick Time (msec)This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click. If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is con-sidered a double-click. The allowable range is 0 to 1000. A value of zero disables this feature.A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the “Click Data” parameter. When a value is not assigned for the “Click Data”, double-click-ing the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the “Dot Time” parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for the “Click Data” parameter, double-clicking the scanner trigger inserts the “Click Data” value rather than initiating a scan.Click DataFor both integrated and external scanners, this parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in your EP10 following a double-click. A dialog box appears, asking that you press the key you want to insert. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the key-press is displayed. Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsOptions TabEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1535.33.2.2 Display ParametersScan ResultWhen this parameter is enabled, the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is released, this information is cleared from the screen.Scan IndicatorWhen this parameter is enabled, the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated.Scan Result Time (sec)The value assigned to the “Scan Result Time (sec)” parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in seconds, and a value of “0” (zero) disables the parameter. When you choose this option, a dialog box appears where you can enter a value.Good Scan Beep And Bad Scan BeepThese parameters determine whether or not the EP10 emits an audible scanner ‘beep’ when a good (successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to either on to enable the beeper or off to disable it.Soft Scan TimeoutThis parameter is used by the SDK “Scan” function (soft-scan: starting a scan session via the SDK function, instead of a physical user trigger press). The value assigned to this parameter determines the soft-scan timeout from 1 to 10 sec. (default is 3 sec.). Scan Log FileIf this parameter is enabled, the input barcode and the modified/translated output bar code are logged in the file \Flash Disk\ScanLog.txt. Keep in mind that if the “Scan Log File” is enabled, there is a slight performance effect when performing multiple scans since the log file is written to persistent storage.Note: To remove the scan result from the screen before the “Result Time” has expired, point the scanner away from the bar code and press the trigger.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTranslations Tab154 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.33.2.3 Data HandlingThis option allows you to choose the code page your EP10 will use to display data – Default Local ASCII or ISO-8859-1 Latin 1. Codepage:Tapping on this option displays a window in which you can define the code page your EP10 will use. If you choose Default Local ASCII, the code page of the local OS is used. For example, if the local OS uses double-byte Chinese characters, choosing this option will filter data through the local ASCII of that OS and display it accurately, in this example, using double-byte characters.If you choose ISO-8859-1 Latin 1, data will be displayed according to the character mapping of this Latin 1 code page, ignoring the local OS code page.5.33.3 Translations TabThe Translations tab allows you to define up to 10 cases, each consisting of up to 10 rules in sequential order. Only one case will be applied to a bar code and a case will only be applied if all rules specified in the case are successful – if a rule within a case fails, the entire case fails.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTr a n sl a ti o n s  Ta bEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 155•In the Translations tab, tap on a Case # to create rules.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTranslations Tab156 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap on the No rule drop-down menu to display the rules.When you choose a rule, an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule.5.33.3.1 Case RulesThe case rules are defined as follows:•No rule – ignored.• Match at index – matches the match string at a specified index.•Match and replace at index – matches the match string at a specified index and replaces/changes it.•Replace at index – replaces/changes unspecified data in a given range.•Add barcode prefix/suffix – adds a global prefix or suffix.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsPorts TabEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 157•Verify barcode size – verifies the bar code size. This rule should generally be assigned first, before creating subsequent rules.•Search and replace – replaces all instances of the match string. (Note that this rule cannot fail.)The information about the status of each case/rule is displayed in the scan log file (see “Scan Log File” on page 153) when enabled. This is useful if a case fails, and you are trying to de-termine why a rule is failing. 5.33.4 Ports TabWhile you cannot configure the scanner, you can configure communications with aserial decoded scanner using the options in this tab.Warning: Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into account when creating subsequent rules. For example, if the bar code size is important, it should be checked before any rules that might change the size are applied.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsPorts Tab158 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.33.4.1 Port Replicator Port A (COM5:)EnabledThis parameter allows you to turn this port on (enable) and off.BaudDouble-tapping on this parameter displays a pop-up window in which you can choose an ap-propriate baud rate.Data BitsThis parameter determines the number of data bits included in each asynchronous data byte. Most devices use 8 bit data bytes. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsPorts TabEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 159ParityThis parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the tether port. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose the appropriate Parity.Stop BitsThis parameter specifies the number of stop bits – 1, 1.5, 2 – used for asynchronous communication.Trigg er On Sequen ce And Trigge r Off Seque nceIf a SICK scanner connected to the EP10 port requires a serial stream of data bytes to trigger the scanner on and another to trigger the scanner off, the Trigger On Sequence and Trigger Off Sequence parameters allow you to define these serial streams.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTotal Recall160 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualDouble-tapping on Trigger On Sequence or Trigger Off Sequence displays a screen with a hex array of 10 elements.These parameters work in conjunction with Manage Triggers sending on and off data streams to the trigger module you assigned. For example, supposed you launch Manage Triggers and choose Decoded Scanner as the ‘module to trigger’. Next, you assign a ‘trigger key’ – for this example, a period (‘.’). To define the serial stream of data bytes to control the on and off function of the ‘trigger key’, enter a hex value in the Trigger On Sequence and the Trigger Off Sequence fields. When you press the trigger key, the Trigger On Sequence is sent and when you release the trigger key, the Trigger Off Sequence is sent, turning the trigger key on and off.5.34 Total RecallTotal Recall is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to back up/restore applications and settings. Note: In Windows Embedded 6.5, the registry and installed programs are stored in the Flash file system and are not lost on reset. However, in special cases, Psion Teklogix personnel may find it necessary to perform a ‘clean start’; this will reset not only the registry settings to factory defaults but will also erase any files or applications stored or installed on the built-in Flash file system, including any Total Recall pro-files. This is why any data that needs to be protected must be stored on a microSD card or externally to the device on a USB memory stick or on a PC.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsCreating a Backup ProfileEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 161• Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Total Recall icon.In the drop-down menu, you can choose: Create Backup Profile, Restore Selected Profile, View Selected Profile Data, and Delete Selected Profile. Keep in mind that until a profile is created, only one option is available – Create Backup Profile.5.34.1 Creating a Backup Profile• Tap on the Next button to begin the process.Profile InformationThis dialog box lists the possible storage destinations for the profile file.• To begin, type a name for the profile in the field labelled Profile Name. Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsCreating a Backup Profile162 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Next, choose the Profile Type you want to create:-For this device only – creates a backup that is manually restored by the operator.-AutoRestore for this device only – creates a profile that automatically restores itself following a cold start.• Finally, choose a Profile Location. • Tap on the Next button to display the next dialog box, Add Files.Add FilesBy default, All Files is selected so that all installed or copied files, database entries and the registry will be saved. You can, however, limit the backup to Databases, the Registry and/or Selected Files.• Tap on the Next button to view your selections.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsCreating a Backup ProfileEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 163View SelectionsDepending on what you have selected for inclusion in your profile, you can view a list of all files, selected files, databases, and/or the registry.• If you’re satisfied with the items in the profile, tap on Next.Performing the Backup• Tap on Backup to begin the process and create a profile.When the backup is finished, a dialog box is presented stating that the backup has been com-pleted successfully.• Tap on Finish to exit Total Recall.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsRestoring a Profile164 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.34.2 Restoring a ProfileTo manually restore a profile:• Choose Restore Selected Profile from the drop-down menu, and choose the Profile Name you want to restore.• In the next screen, tap on Restore to restore your profile.5.35 TweakITThis utility allows you to ‘tweak’ or adjust Advanced system settings (interface, network and servers), User settings (font size and docking port message), and provides a Registry Editor.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsAdvanced Interface And NetworkEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1655.35.1 Advanced Interface And NetworkEnable IPv6This option allows you to enable Internet Protocol, version 6, that has been published to use 128-bit IP address (replacing version 4).Modem LoggingWhen this option is enabled, the EP10 logs AT commands (e.g., dial-out information, pass-word string, etc.) that the administrator can monitor for debugging purposes. Modem commands are stored in: \MdmLog.txt.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsAdvanced Services Settings166 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.35.2 Advanced Services SettingsFTP ServerThis option is enabled by default to allow file transfers. Keep in mind that data transfer in either direction is restricted to the Temp folder – that is, data are always loaded from the FTP Server to the Temp  folder and from the Temp folder to the FTP Server.If this option is disabled, a warm reset must be performed to accept the change.SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) ServerThe SNTP Server Name typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize EP10 time with that of the time server. A warm reset must be performed once the server name has been entered.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsRadio FeaturesEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1675.35.3 Radio FeaturesAP DensityThis option allows you to determine the signal strength at which the EP10 radio will begin searching for a new Access Point (AP): High, Medium or Low. If this option is set to High, the radio will begin searching for a new Access Point while still at a fairly strong signal strength. Setting AP Density to Low will cause the radio to wait until the signal strength is significantly low before attempting to connect to another Access Point.Depending on your site configuration – for example, the shelving, the Access Point cover-age, etc. – a higher setting may improve through-put, increase and maintain signal strength, and reduce missed transmissions.Radio Power ManagementWhen this option is enabled, access points that support it will use Radio Power Management guidelines to control the EP10 radio. Access points determine how often the EP10 radio Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsUser System Setting168 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manualenters sleep mode when no activity is detected to reduce power consumption. Another benefit is that when Radio Power Management is enabled, even when no activity is de-tected, the access point does not disassociate the EP10. 5.35.4 User System SettingDocking Port MessageChecking this box blocks the message that normally pops up on the display when the EP10 is docked.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsRegistry EditorEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1695.35.5 Registry EditorThis option is reserved for senior administrators who have a strong understanding of registry keys and values. Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to the EP10.5.36 Windows UpdateThis program checks for software updates, and if found, downloads updates to your EP10. You can choose to have updates checked automatically, or if you prefer, you can determine when your unit will check for updates. 5.37 Connections TabThis tab is used to setup connections using Bluetooth and 802.11 radios.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsNavigation Bar Hotkeys170 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab to display your connection options.5.37.1 Navigation Bar HotkeysSome of the connectivity icons in the Navigation Bar along the top of the screen are hotkeys that offer shortcuts to connection setups. Tapping on a hotkey displays a bubble that pro-vides information about your connections and provides a shortcut to the Wireless Manager applet where you can set up your connections.Automatic NotificationThe Navigation Bar also displays notification icons to let you know, for example, that a network as been detected. or if your EP10 is equipped with a phone, that you’ve missed a call, a voice mail or a text message.Tap on these connectivity hotkeysto display Notification Bubbles Notification BubbleNavigation BarPreliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsNavigation Bar HotkeysEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 171Automatic Network Detection If a wireless network is available when you switch on your hand-held, a notification bubble may appear letting you know which networks have been found. You can choose a network from here.Tapping on Connect in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen will automatically connect to a network that’s already been set up. Tapping on Settings in the network bubble will launch the Wireless Manager applet.If you prefer not see this notification bubble, you can tap on the Menu button in the softkey bar, and choose not to display the notification bubble.Multiple NotificationsIf more than one item is detected, all the items can be accessed by tapping on the small mul-tiple notification icon shaped like a word bubble in the Navigation Bar. Tapping on it Network DetectionIconPreliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsBeam172 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manualdisplays a group of notification icons – in the sample screen below, a missed call icon and a new voice message icon.Tapping on any of these icons displays an associated notification bubble with information about and access to the missed call(s) or voice message(s).5.38 BeamThis option is not available for the EP10.5.39 Bluetooth SetupBluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area Networks (PAN). The technology is based on a short-range radio link that operates in the ISM band at 2.4 GHz. When two Bluetooth-equipped devices come within a 10 meter range of each other, they can establish a connection. Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio-based link, it does not require a line-of-sight connection in order to communicate. • Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Bluetooth icon.Missed Call Icon New Voice Message IconMultiple Notification IconPreliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsThe Devices TabEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1735.39.1 The Devices TabThis tab allows you to scan for other Bluetooth enabled devices, and it allows you to pair devices.To add a new device:• Tap on Add new device....The EP10 scans for a Bluetooth device within a 10 meter range. Any Bluetooth devices within range appear in the Bluetooth list boxNote: You may need to enable your Bluetooth radio before you begin. Refer to “Bluetooth Mode” on page 176 for details.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsThe Devices Tab174 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Highlight the device you want to add. Tap on Next.• If required, type your Passcode. If not, skip this step and just tap on Next.A pop-up message lets you know that your device has been connected to your EP10.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsThe Devices TabEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 175• To change the Display Name, tap on the Advanced button. This is an optional step.• Tap on Save.5.39.1.1 Pairing a DeviceIf you intend to pair devices (a headset, for example), power on and bring the device within 10 meters of the EP10 before proceeding with the discovery process described below.Note: To connect to a Bluetooth-equipped device that’s already been added, tap on the item in Bluetooth list box.Important: Follow the steps under “Pairing a Bluetooth Headset” on page 25 to pair a Bluetooth a headset with your EP10.If you prefer, you can go to the Today screen, and tap on – Getting Started>Set up Bluetooth – to get pairing information. Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsBluetooth Mode176 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.39.2 Bluetooth Mode•Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab following by the Bluetooth icon. Next, tap on the Mode tab.When Turn on Bluetooth is checked, Bluetooth features are available. If this option is dis-abled, you cannot send or receive information using Bluetooth.When Make this device visible to other devices is enabled, other Bluetooth devices within range (approximately 10 meters) can detect your EP10 and can establish a bond or use a Bluetooth service. Note that other devices can detect your unit whether or not a bond has been created.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsBluetooth COM PortsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1775.39.3 Bluetooth COM PortsNew Outgoing PortWhen you pair the EP10 with another device, New Outgoing Port is listed in this dialog box. Tapping on this option allows you to assign an outgoing COM port number. • To work with an existing COM port number, tap and hold the stylus on an existing port.To assign a new port number, make certain that your EP10 is connected to the other device via Bluetooth.•In the COM Ports tab, tap on New Outgoing Port.• Choose a COM port number from the list.Note: If a port cannot be created, the number you’ve chosen is already in use. Choose a dif-ferent port number.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsOutgoing Port178 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.39.4 Outgoing PortOutgoing Port acts as a serial port that can be used to connect to a list of Bluetooth devices (one at a time). This tab allows you to assign and enable an outgoing port and choose the device with which you want to communicate from the list. You can also tailor the behaviour of your EP10 so that you are prompted to choose the device with which you want to communicate.5.39.5 ServicesThe Bluetooth Services tab is used to assign a virtual serial port for incoming Bluetooth (se-rial) communications. Virtual ports are required because while normally, an application uses a true COM (hardware) port to transmit data, Bluetooth uses a virtual port.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsActive ConnectionsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 179You can assign either a BSP or a COM prefix from the drop-down menu. BSP (Bluetooth Serial Port) was created by Microsoft to allow Bluetooth to have its own serial prefix in order to free up virtual COM prefixes as these are limited and are widely used. (In Windows Embedded 6.5, the COM Ports tab is used to assign a virtual outgoing COM port to a Paired Bluetooth service, and the Outgoing Port tab is used to assign multiple outgoing Bluetooth services to a single virtual port.)5.39.6 Active ConnectionsThis tab displays the currently active Bluetooth connections, listing the device name(s). The type of link is also included with the device name(s). Keep in mind that the information listed in this tab is ‘view only’; it cannot be edited.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsAbout Tab180 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.39.7 About TabThe About tab displays information about the Bluetooth module, such as the manufacturer name, local address and version. Like the Active tab, this information cannot be edited.5.39.8 The Bluetooth GPRS PhoneOnce you’ve completed the Bluetooth settings, you can go ahead and set up communication through your Bluetooth-equipped phone.Before you begin, make certain that the Bluetooth phone is turned on, that the Bluetooth radio in your EP10 and in your phone are switched on, and that the EP10 and phone are within 10 metres of each other. Both should be discoverable.1. Tap on Start>Settings and then tap on the Connections tab.2. Tap on the Connections icon. Tap on Add a new modem connection.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsThe Bluetooth GPRS PhoneEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1813. Type a name for the connection.4. Tap on the Select a modem drop-down menu, and choose Bluetooth. Tap on Next.5. Make certain that the phone is discoverable. Some phones also need to be pairable in order to accept a bonding request. Refer to your phone documentation for addi-tional information.6. If the phone appears in the My Connections list, skip to step 12.7. In the list, tap phone and then tap on Next.8. In the PIN screen, type a personal identification number (PIN) – you can enter up to 16 characters.9. Enter the same PIN on the phone.10. If you wish, you can edit the name of the phone in the Name field.11. Tap on the Finish button.12. In the My Connections list, tap on the phone and then on Next.13. Enter the dial-up phone number for this connection, and tap on Next.14. In the User name, Password and Domain fields, enter the logon information for this connection, and tap on Finish.You can begin using the Bluetooth phone connection, for example, to send and receive e-mail, browse the Internet with Internet Explorer, and so on.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsConnection Properties182 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.40 Connection PropertiesThis applet is used to set up serial modem connections.• Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Connection Properties icon• Choose a connection from the drop-down menu, and tap on Edit Properties.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsPort SettingsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1835.40.1 Port SettingsBaud RateIn the Baud rate drop-down menu, choose a new baud rate. Check your modem documen-tation for the appropriate baud rate.Data BitsThis parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port. Possible values are: 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.ParityThis parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port. The options are: none, odd, even, mark and space.Stop BitsThis parameter specifies the number of stop bits – 1, 1.5, 2 – used for asynchronous communication.Flow ControlThis parameter selects the type of flow control used in your hand-held. The EP10 can perform Software or Hardware handshaking, or you can choose None.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsCall Options184 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.40.2 Call OptionsCancel Call If Not Connected WithinTap in the checkbox to enable this option to make certain that the EP10 does not stay online too long while waiting to connect with a network.Enter the number of seconds after which the call will be cancelled.Wait For Dial Tone Before Dialing To speed connection when using a modem, disable this option – tap in the checkbox to the left of this option.Wait For Credit CardIf you are paying for calls with a credit card, enter the number of seconds you want the EP10 to wait for a credit card prompt.Extra Dial-String Modem CommandsType your credit card number in this field.5.41 Connections – Connecting to the InternetTo activate a connection, make certain that any necessary equipment is installed in your EP10 such as a radio.You’ll need the following information from your ISP to make an internet connection:•  ISP server phone number, •user name, and • password.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsModem Connection SetupEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1851. Tap Start>Settings, and then tap on the Connections tab.2. Tap on the Connections icon.3. Under My ISP, tap on Add a new modem connection.4. In the Select a modem drop-down menu, choose a modem connection. If you haven’t already created a modem connection, refer to “Modem Connection Setup” on page 185.5. To connect to the Internet, launch the program you want to use. For example, launch Internet Explorer on your EP10 to browse the Internet. Your EP10 automatically connects.5.41.1 Modem Connection SetupBefore you begin, you’ll need the following information from your ISP or network adminis-trator: telephone number, password, domain name, and TCP/IP settings.Note: In the Connections window, the Tasks tab is used to create new connections and manage existing ones. The Advanced tab allows you to choose a network. If you need to change these settings, contact your ISP or network administrator before making changes.Note: To set up a network card or wireless network connection to your ISP, add a new con-nection under My Work Network.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsModem Connection Setup186 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualIf your EP10 does not have access to a mobile phone network, insert a modem card in the unit.1. Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.2. To create a new connection in either My ISP or My Work Network, tap on Add a new modem connection.3. In the Make New Connection screen, type a name for the connection.4. In the drop-down menu under Select a modem, tap on your modem type.5. Tap on the Next button.Note: If your modem is not listed in the drop-down menu, choose Hayes Compatible on COM1.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsModem Connection SetupEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1876. In the next screen, enter the phone number exactly as you want it dialed. If, for example, you need to dial 9 for an outside line, enter 9 at the beginning of the phone number.7. Tap on the Next button.8. Type the User Name, Password and Domain Name as provided by your ISP or network administrator.9. Tap on the Finish button.If you need to edit the Advanced settings, refer to “Advanced Modem Settings” in the next section.Note: Generally, you will not need to change any of the Advanced settings. For information about the Advanced settings, refer to“Advanced Modem Settings”Changes to Advanced settings are only required in the following instances:To change the baud rate settings, dialing string commands or credit card options.To change port settings.To enter TCP/IP settings because the server to which you are connecting does not dynamically assign addresses.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsModem Connection Setup188 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.41.1.1 Advanced Modem SettingsTCP/IP Settings TabIf your server assigns IP addresses dynamically, you will not need to change these settings. If you need to make changes, contact your ISP or network administrator for addresses.Server Settings TabIf your server assigns IP addresses dynamically, you will not need to change these settings.Servers requiring assigned IP addresses may also need a way to map computer names to IP addresses. The EP10 supports a variety of name resolution options: DNS, Alt DNS, WINS and Alt WINS.Your ISP or network administrator can determine which name resolution you need, and can also provide the server address. In addition, you will want to ask if alternate addresses are available. An alternate address may allow you to connect when the primary server is not available.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsWireless Manager IconEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 1895.42 Wireless Manager IconThe Wireless Manager icon acts as a connection manager, providing access to Wi-Fi, Blue-tooth, GPS and GSM/GPRS settings. • Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Wireless Manager icon.• To access radio Settings, highlight a radio in this dialog box, and tap on the Settings button.• To turn off a radio, highlight the radio and tap on the Disable button.5.42.1 Flight Mode – Disabling Wireless ComponentsTo disable all wireless components when, for example, you are taking your EP10 onto a plane where wireless connections need to be shut down:• Tap on the Disable All button.To enable wireless components:• Tap on Enable All. Important: The ‘Wireless Manager’ option provides detailed Help files to assist you in setting up your EP10. Help is available from the Connections tab – not from within the Wireless Manager dialog box.To access Wireless Manager help files, tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab. Tap on Start>Help.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsSetting Up a Network Card190 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualTo disable a particular radio connection rather than all connections:• Highlight an Available (enabled) radio listed in this dialog box, and then tap on the Disable button.5.42.2 Setting Up a Network CardNetwork (802.11) cards are used to connect to a network so that you can browse the Internet, download e-mail and so on. You can connect to an existing network, or you can set up a new connection on your EP10.5.42.3 Network Adaptor CardsWhen the network card is inserted in your unit for the first time, the Network Settings screen is displayed automatically so that you can configure the card. If it does not appear, or if you want to change settings:• Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab.Important: The EP10 is equipped with context sensitive Help Files. If you find that you’re unsure how to proceed with a network connection at any point during setup, tap on the question mark icon in the navigation bar at the top of the screen. Important: For 802.11b/g (Summit) CF card adaptor setup details, refer to “Setting Up the 802.11a/b/g/n Radio” on page 21.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsNetwork Adaptor CardsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 191• Tap on the Network Cards icon.• If you need to specify server information, double-tap on the appropriate adaptor, and then tap on the IP Address and/or Name Servers tab.• If necessary, use a network cable to connect the network card to your network. Refer to the documentation shipped with your network card for details.• To activate the connection, launch the desired program (e.g., Internet Explorer). The EP10 will connect automatically.Note: Because most networks use DHCP, you should not need to change these settings unless instructed to do so by your network administrator.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsChanging Network Card Settings192 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.42.4 Changing Network Card Settings• If you use your network card in two locations such as work and home, you’ll need to change the network to which the network card connects.• Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Network Cards icon.•In the Configure Network Adapters dialog box, tap on the drop-down menu under My network card connects to, choose either The Internet or Work.5.42.5 VPN Connection SetupA VPN connection provides a secure connection to servers through the Internet.Before you begin, you need the following information from your network administrator: password, domain name, TCP/IP settings and a host name or IP address of the VPN server.• Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.• Under My Work Network, tap on Add a new VPN server connection.•In the Name field, type a name for this connection.•In Host name/IP, type the VPN server name or IP address.• Tap on the VPN type radio button next to the type of authentication for your EP10: IPSec/L2TP or PPTP. Your network administrator will let you know which option applies to your hand-held.• Tap on Next.• Choose the type of authentication in this screen. If you choose A pre-shared key, type the key provided by your network administrator.• Tap on Next.• Type your user name, password and domain name. If a domain name was not pro-vided to you, try the connection without entering a domain name.If you need to edit the Advanced settings, refer to “Advanced Modem Settings” on page 188 for details about this tab.• Tap on Finish.Note: Normally, you will not need to change any advanced settings. You will need to make changes only under only the following circumstances:The server to which you are connecting does not dynamically assign addresses, and TCP/IP settings need to be entered.Server DNS or WINS settings need to be changed.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsManaging an Existing ConnectionEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 193• Launch a program like Internet Explorer to activate the connection. The VPN connec-tion will start automatically.5.42.6 Managing an Existing ConnectionOnce you’ve defined a connection, a new option appears in the first Connections screen–Manage existing connections.5.42.6.1 Editing a Connection• Tap on Settings>Connections tab. Tap on the Connections icon.• Tap on Manage existing connections.• To launch a connection from this screen, press and hold the stylus on the connection you want to activate. Choose Connect from the pop-up menu.• To delete a connection, press and hold the stylus on the connection you want to delete. Choose Delete from the pop-up menu.5.42.6.2 Changing a Connection Setting NameYour EP10 has two sets of connection settings: My ISP and My Work Network. If you want to change one or both of these options to something more familiar to you, follow these steps.• Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.• Under My Work Network or My ISP, tap on Manage existing connections.Ta p  h e r eNote: You can also create a new connection by tapping on the New button. To make changes to the settings for this connection, tap on Edit.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsSelecting a Network194 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Tap on the General tab.• Type the name you prefer in the field labelled Enter a name for these settings.• Tap on OK.5.42.7 Selecting a NetworkPrivate networks are used for work-related activities. Internet networks are used for home connection to your ISP. The My Work Network settings are used for private network connec-tions (corporate networks), while My ISP settings are used for Internet network connections.When you use programs such as Internet Explorer, your EP10 automatically connects using private network settings under My Work Network or Internet settings under My ISP, depend-ing on specifications. You can determine how your EP10 connects.•Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon. Important: Normally, you will not need to change these settings. Contact your ISP or network administrator before making any changes.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsProxy Server SetupEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 195• Tap on the Advanced tab.• Tap on Select Networks.• In the appropriate lists, choose My ISP or My Work Network.5.42.8 Proxy Server SetupTo set up the proxy server connection manually, you’ll need the following information: proxy server name, server type, port, type of Socks protocol used, and the user name and password.•Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.Note: If you are connected to your ISP or private network during synchronization, the EP10 will download the appropriate settings during synchronization from your PC. If these settings are not on your PC, or if they need to be changed, you’ll need to set up the proxy server connection manually.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsProxy Server Setup196 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Under My Work Network, tap on Set up my proxy server.• Add a checkmark next to This network connects to the Internet and This network uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet.•In the Proxy server field, type the proxy server name.• Tap on OK to save your changes.5.42.8.1 Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings• To change advanced settings such as the port number or proxy server type, tap on the Advanced button.Note: If you need to change advanced settings such as a port number or proxy server type, you’ll need to tap on the Advanced button rather than tapping on OK. Advanced settings are described in “Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings” on page 196.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsWireless StatisticsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 197• Tap on the proxy type you want to change. For the appropriate server type, type the proxy server name and port.• Tap on OK.5.43 Wireless Statistics• Tap on Start>Settings>Connections tab>Wireless Statistics icon to display the com-munication statistics of your wireless connection along with the radio card name, MAC address, driver version and NDIS Compliance information.• Tap on the Zero button to reset the statistics.5.44 Wireless WAN An EP10 equipped with a UMTS radio has wide area networking data transfer capabilities.5.44.1 Softkey Bar IconsWireless WAN icons in the softkey bar indicate the status of your wide area network con-nection. Note that these icons are only visible when a GSM/GPRS, CDMA/1xRTT or UMTS radio is installed in the unit, and the interface is enabled.The letter in the signal strength icon (G for GSM/GPRS, U for UMTS and X for CDMA/1xRTT) indicates that a packet data service is available and initialized. Keep in mind that the signal strength icon is displayed without a letter if packet data service is not available or if it is available but not yet initialized.User interaction is required (e.g. the user is required to enter a PIN).A non-recoverable (fatal) error has occurred.GSM/GPRS Status IndicatorsSignal strength is between 1% and 20%.Signal strength is between 21% and 40%.Signal strength is between 41% and 60%.Signal strength is between 61% and 80%.Signal strength is between 81% and 100%.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsEstablishing a Connection198 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualA GPRS packet data connection is active.CDMA/1xRTTSignal strength is between 1% and 20%.Signal strength is between 21% and 40%.Signal strength is between 41% and 60%.Signal strength is between 61% and 80%.Signal strength is between 81% and 100%.A CDMA/1xRTT packet data connection is active.5.44.2 Establishing a Connection• Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab followed by the Wireless WAN icon.The Status field indicates when the unit is ready to connect–the Connect Data button is enabled.• Tap on the Connect Data button.The progress of the connection is tracked in the Status field.• PPP link to modem activeNote: If you are prompted to enter a PIN, refer to “Entering a PIN” on page 199 for details.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsDisconnecting from a NetworkEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 199• Authenticating user• User authenticated• ConnectedWhen the connection state reaches PPP link to modem active, the softkey bar icon changes to indicate an active connection. The Connect Data button changes, displaying Disconnect.5.44.3 Disconnecting from a NetworkTo disconnect from the network:• Tap on the Disconnect button, and then on OK.When the EP10 network connection is severed, the Status field displays Ready to Connect.A unit equipped with a GSM/GPRS expansion board displays the signal strength in the main Wireless WAN screen, even while a connection is active. Units equipped with certain other modems (e.g. Sierra Wireless UMTS and CDMA modems, Novatel UMTS modems) do not display the signal strength while a connection is active.The Rx bytes and Tx bytes fields esti-mate the amount of data transmitted and received, respectively.5.44.3.1 Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User InterfaceWhile it is not usual to shut down the GSM/GPRS user interface, you can accomplish this by tapping on the File menu and choosing the Exit command in the Wireless WAN screen.5.44.4 Advanced InformationIn most cases, when a GSM/GPRS radio and SIM are installed in your EP10, setup is auto-matic. Follow the steps outlined under the heading “Establishing a Connection” on page 198 to make a connection. The information in this section is for advanced setup purposes.5.44.4.1 Entering a PINIf a PIN is required, a PIN entry dialog box is displayed.• Type your PIN, and press [ENTER/Power].Note: Keep in mind that these states may be displayed fairly quickly if the progress of the connection is rapid. Note: Once you’ve shut down the user interface, you can only enable the radio by tapping on the Wireless WAN icon to display the dialog box.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsAdvanced Information200 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualOnce the correct PIN or PUK is entered or if none was required, the modem is instructed to perform a GSM network registration followed by a GPRS attach. The main Wireless WAN dialog box reflects the progress of the initialization.• Searching for modem• Initializing modem• SIM is ready• Searching for network• Registered on network• Searching for packet data• Ready to connectIf the modem loses the connection to the GSM network, the following states are repeated: Searching for network, Registered on network, Searching for packet data and Ready to connect. 5.44.4.2 Error StatesThe following temporary error states–states that may disappear without interaction– may be displayed:• Emergency calls onlyThe modem has found a network but is not allowed to register (e.g. no roaming agreement between networks). The modem keeps searching for another network.• No network foundA network is not currently available. The modem continues searching for a network.• Packet data not availableThe current network does not support packet data.• Packet data not allowedThe modem is not allowed to use packet data on the current network (e.g. no packet data roaming agreement between network; a roaming agreement for voice may still be in place). It is also possible that you do not have a subscription for packet data at all.The remaining error states are permanent:• SIM is missingNote: If you exceed the number of allowable attempts, a PUK entry window is brought to the foreground. You’ll need to enter a new PIN number.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTools MenuEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 201The SIM card is missing. After the SIM has been inserted a reset may be required.• SIM failureThe SIM card is permanently disabled (e.g. because the wrong PUK has been entered too many times). A new SIM is needed.• Modem failureThe modem did not respond to commands as expected. If a reset does not clear this condi-tion, the modem may need to be replaced.• NDIS errorAn internal software error has occurred. If a reset does not clear this condition, Psion Tek-logix technical support may need to investigate further.5.44.5 Tools MenuThe Tools menu in the main Wireless WAN dialog box offers some additional, advanced setup features.5.44.5.1 Data Connection ConfigurationEnable Automatic ConnectIf the Enable automatic connect checkbox is checked (unchecked by default), the Wireless WAN user interface will attempt to establish a packet data connection whenever packet data is available (e.g. after resume from suspend without further user interaction). To activate the automatic connection mode:• Tap on the OK button.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsToo ls  Menu202 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualWhile automatic connection mode is enabled, the Connect Data button in the main Wireless LAN dialog box changes to Disable Auto. To close the currently active connection (if any) and disable the automatic connection mode:• Tap on Disable Auto.Use Virtual Serial PortIf Use virtual serial port is enabled, packet data connections are established through the virtual serial port of the WWAN driver rather than through the WWAN driver directly. This checkbox should only be checked if certain third-party VPN (Virtual Private Network) clients are used that do not work correctly otherwise. The default setting is disabled (unchecked).Enable Automatic ConfigurationIn most cases, the data connection is configured automatically and no user interaction is re-quired. This is true even if multiple SIM cards from different operators are used with the same device. The connection parameters are adjusted automatically when a new SIM card is detected (this may require a reset). The connection parameters are retrieved from a database. Manual configuration should be necessary only if:• One or more parameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is not yet in the database. (The database should be corrected for subsequent software releases.)• An operator has assigned individual packet data user names and passwords. • A very large site has their own APN. Such connections always have to be configured manually.• A customer has subscribed for a static IP address. By definition this must be configured manually.Important: Automatic connection mode should not be used if applications other than the Wireless WAN user interface (e.g. Connection Manager) are expected to open and close connections. If the automatic connection mode is enabled and another application closes the packet data connection, the WWAN user interface will immediately try to re-establish the connection.Note: The connection setup takes longer through the virtual serial port.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTools MenuEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 203In the following section, all the parameters that need to be configured for a connection (such as APN, user name, password, DNS server addresses etc.) are referred to as a profile. Every profile is identified by an arbitrary, unique name. The profile named Default is special in that it is always present and can neither be edited nor deleted. (A sample dialog box is pre-sented on the page following.) The Default profile uses parameters from a built-in database. The home network (the network that issued the SIM) is used for the database look-up. While there can be many configured profiles, only one profile can be active at any time.If connection profiles are configured manually then the Enable automatic configuration: checkbox should normally be unchecked.In one particular use case, manually configured profiles may be combined with automatic configuration. If multiple SIM cards are used with the same device, each SIM card being from a different operator and some or all of them requiring a manually set up profile, auto-matic configuration may be used to automatically pick the correct manually configured profile for each SIM card. For this to work each profile has to be configured while the corre-sponding SIM card is inserted in the device and initialized (i.e. the status is at least SIM is ready).The Select profile drop-down list in the data configuration profile selects which profile a subsequent action applies to. A profile named Default is always present and contains the current parameters from the database. The following actions are available:•Show – The parameters for the selected profile are displayed when you tap on this button. For the Default profile, the publicly known password is shown – otherwise, the password is hidden.•Edit – The parameters of the selected profile can be edited when you choose the Edit button. Keep in mind that you cannot edit the Default profile.•Delete – The selected profile is deleted. You cannot delete the Default profile.•Activate – When this button is chosen, the selected profile is made the active profile. Activation is possible only if the Enable automatic configuration: checkbox is unchecked.Important: For CDMA/1xRTT, automatic configuration is not available – connec-tions must be configured manually. Under APN, the packet service access number must be entered (typically “#777”).Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsToo ls  Menu204 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual•New – Tapping on the New button allows you to create a new profile. The name of the newly created profile must be different from all existing profiles. Also, the name cannot be Default. When the New Data Profile dialog box is opened, a proposal for a unique name is filled in the corresponding entry field. If a manually configured profile has a secret password and unauthorized access to the device is a concern even after the SIM PIN has been entered, the password should not be entered in the New Data Profile dialog box and the Prompt user for password checkbox should be checked instead. In this case, you will be prompted for the password each time a connection is initiated (the Connect Data button in the main Wireless WAN dialog box is selected).•Reset – The Reset button in the New Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes resets all entry fields to the values they had when the dialog box was opened. Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTools MenuEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 205•Advanced IP – The Advanced IP button in the Show Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes opens another dialog box that allows you to configure a static IP address as well as the IP addresses for the primary and secondary DNS and WINS resolvers.5.44.5.2 Security ConfigurationThe Security Configuration dialog box is called up through the Tools menu.The Security Configuration dialog box allows you to enable, disable and change the PIN. You will need the current PIN to make any of these changes. The PIN must be enabled in order to be changed. (If the PIN is disabled, the New PIN entry field is greyed out.)The Require PIN on resume checkbox is independent of the aforementioned settings. By de-fault, this checkbox is unchecked. While the checkbox remains unchecked, any PIN entered on startup or through the Security Configuration dialog box and submitted successfully to the modem is stored in memory for as long as the device is not rebooted. This stored PIN is then used without further user interaction whenever the modem requires a PIN (such as resume after suspend or modem removal). The stored PIN is also automatically entered in the Current PIN text box whenever the Security Configuration dialog box is called up. Note: Security configuration is not available with CDMA modems.Note: Keep in mind that some network operators do not allow the SIM PIN to be dis-abled. A new PIN must consist of 4 to 8 numeric digits.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsToo ls  Menu206 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualIf unauthorized access to the device is a concern, the Require PIN on resume checkbox should be checked. In this case, you will be prompted whenever a PIN is required and the PIN is not stored.5.44.5.3 Network ConfigurationIn the main Wireless WAN screen:• Tap on the Tools menu, and choose Network.By default the GSM radio modem automatically chooses from the available and allowed networks (allowed networks are the home network and all other networks with which the home network has a roaming agreement). You may find there are some situations in which you want to override this default behaviour. For example, you may want to disable roaming if you find yourself in a border area where the home network is not available but a foreign roaming partner is available. Abroad, you may find that an available network does not have packet data roaming agreements. In this case, you’ll need to manually select the network which you know to support packet data roaming.Automatic network selection is enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking Enable auto-matic network select in the Network dialog box. When automatic network selection is disabled, you must select a network manually.Available networks can also be viewed without changing any settings. Scanning for avail-able networks is a lengthy operation – a progress bar is shown while the scan is active. For every network that is found, the network name, country, status and numeric network identi-fier (MCC/MNC, Mobile Country Code followed by the Mobile Network Code) is displayed.Note: Network configuration is not available with CDMA modems.Note: Your home network operator will need to let you know which other networks have roaming agreements. Even when a network is listed with an ‘Available’ status, it does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that the roaming agreement cov-ers packet data. A status of ‘Forbidden’ indicates that the network cannot be used. If you choose a network that is not covered by a roaming agreement, the status in the main WWAN dialog box changes to ‘Emergency calls only’, ‘No network found’, ‘GPRS not available’ or ‘GPRS not allowed’.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsTools MenuEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2075.44.5.4 Driver Mode ConfigurationBy default, the Wireless WAN driver is enabled (the Enable driver checkbox is checked). The driver must be disabled in order to access the modem directly (e.g. dial-up data, fax, or in order to manually submit AT commands to the modem for development, testing, approv-als, etc.). In most cases, the Virtual WWAN serial port can be used and it is not necessary to disable the WWAN driver. If the Enable driver checkbox is not checked, the driver is shut down as soon as the OK button in the Driver Mode dialog box tapped. If, on the other hand, the Wireless WAN driver is not running and the Enable driver check-box is checked, the Wireless WAN driver is started as soon the Driver Mode dialog box is closed using the OK button. Since all currently supported modems are automatically detected, the Enable automatic port detection checkbox should always be checked. If this checkbox is not checked, a serial port can be selected manually. This experimental feature allows the driver to be used with an in-ternal GSM modem that was not recognized by the automatic detection or an external GSM modem connected to a serial port of the computer through USB or through Bluetooth. An external modem connected to a serial port must support 115.2kbit/s, 8bit, no parity and hard-ware flow control.5.44.5.5 Modem InformationThe fields in this dialog box cannot be edited – they only display information about the EP10 modem. If the network operator has not programmed a user’s phone number into the Note: When the driver is not running, no network status or signal strength can be displayed.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsToo ls  Menu208 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualSIM, the Phone field remains empty. The modem serial number is called IMEI for GSM modems and ESN for CDMA modems.The SIM ID is sometimes referred to as the ICC ID (International Charge Card Identifier). Not all modems support the retrieval of the SIM ID. In particular, the Novatel Merlin UMTS modems and the Option Globetrotter modems do not support SIM ID retrieval.If the main menu shows an error status, at least partial modem information may be available.Modem Power ModesThe power mode of the modem is controlled through the Power icon rather than through the Wireless WAN user interface. To adjust PC Card and CF card modems settings:• Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab followed by the Power icon.• Tap on the Built-in Devices tab.If the checkbox for a modem is unchecked, power is not applied to the modem and a driver is not loaded (neither the serial port driver nor the Wireless WAN driver). If the checkbox is checked, power is applied to the modem and the drivers are loaded when the EP10 is turned on. Power is removed from the modem when the EP10 enters suspend mode.To enable a modem module that is built into the unit:• Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System tab followed by the Power icon. For a modem module that is built into the EP10, the settings can be found under the Built-in Devices tab. In this case, one of the following power modes can be selected:• Disabled – No power is applied to the modem and no driver is loaded.• Enabled – Off in SuspendPower is applied to the modem and the drivers are loaded when the EP10 is turned on. Power is removed from the modem when the terminal enters suspend mode.• Enabled – Always OnWhen the EP10 enters suspend mode, the modem remains powered indefinitely.• Enabled – Keep on for 5 min• Enabled – Keep on for 15 min• Enabled – Keep on for 30 min• Enabled – Keep on for 1 hour• Enabled – Keep on for 2 hoursPreliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsSMS MenuEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 209When the EP10 enters suspend mode, the modem remains powered. If the EP10 is not turned on again during the configured time, the unit briefly wakes up from suspend mode, shuts down the modem, and enters suspend mode again. The default mode is Enabled - Keep on for 1 hour.At the cost of a slightly increased power consumption in suspend mode, the modes where the modem remains powered during suspend mode have several advantages. When the EP10 wakes from suspend mode, the modem is ready immediately; modem or network ini-tialization is not required. A packet data session can thus remain active during suspend mode. In these modes, the modem is also able to wake up the EP10 if the network status changes, or there is a new incoming SMS.5.44.6 SMS MenuSMS functions are accessed through the SMS menu. For modems that support a SIM card, the SIM initialization typically takes longer than the network initialization, resulting in a no-ticeable delay before the SMS functions become available.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsSMS Menu210 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.44.6.1 New SMSTapping on New opens a dialog box for sending a new SMS message. The recipient's phone number (to be entered in the To field) can consist of the digits 0 through 9, as well as the * and # characters, optionally preceded by one + character, indicating an international number (i.e. the country code follows immediately after the + character).By checking the Store message in Outbox field, a new message can be stored in the Outbox before being sent. If no storage space is available or the modem does not support the storage of outgoing messages, this checkbox is disabled.5.44.6.2 InboxTapping on Inbox opens the list of received messages. Reading 50 messages, for example, from the SIM can take about 30 seconds. By default the list of messages is sorted with the Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsSMS MenuEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 211most recently received message first. The list can be sorted by any other column by clicking on the corresponding column heading.Clicking the same column heading twice reverses the sort order. Pressing any letter or digit moves the highlight to the next message whose address begins with that letter or number.The Open button opens the selected message in a new window such that the entire message can be read including the original formatting (line breaks are replaced by spaces in the Inbox message list). Pressing the Reply button opens the new message dialog as described above, except the destination phone number is already filled in. Pressing the Delete button erases the message.5.44.6.3 OutboxTapping on Outbox opens a list of sent messages. Otherwise the Outbox behaves exactly as the Inbox described above. The date and time when a message was sent is not available for GSM modems.Note: The date and time formats can be changed through the Regional Settings in the Con-trol Panel. For a new date or time format to take effect, the Inbox has to be closed and re-opened.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsSMS Menu212 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual5.44.6.4 SMS ConfigurationTapping on SMS Configuration opens the SMS configuration dialog. The SMS Centre Address follows the same rules as the recipient's phone number in the New message dialog. The Message Validity Period parameter is sent to the SMS Centre with each message sent subsequently and instructs the SMS Centre on how long it should attempt to deliver the message to the recipient (the SMS Centre may impose an upper limit on the validity period regardless of the setting).The user interface tries to keep the SMS storage location available for a new incoming message if the Delete oldest message when full checkbox is checked. In this case, when a new message arrives and the SMS storage becomes full, the oldest received message is de-leted. If any string is entered as the Message Suppression Prefix, messages beginning with that string will not be shown in either the Inbox or Outbox. In this way, messages intended for another application running on the same device can be hidden.Note: Only certain discrete validity period values can be sent and thus, the validity period is rounded to the nearest allowed value. The next time the SMS configuration dialog is opened, the rounded value is shown.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 5: SettingsWindows UpdateEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2135.45 Windows UpdateThis program checks for software updates, and if found, downloads updates to your EP10. You can choose to have updates checked automatically, or if you prefer, you can determine when your unit will check for updates. Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 215PERIPHERAL DEVICES & ACCESSORIES 66.1 Carrying Accessories . . . ...............................2196.1.1 The Hand Strap with Tether – Model No. RV6021 .............2196.1.2 Attaching the Tether – Model No. RV6020 .................2216.1.3 Carrying Pouch................................2226.2 The Battery.......................................2226.3 Adaptor Cable Options.................................2236.4 Chargers and Docking Stations.............................2236.4.1 Important Safety Instructions.........................2236.4.2 Installation: Chargers and Docking Stations.................2246.4.3 Power Consumption Considerations.....................2256.5 Desktop Docking Station – Model No. RV4000 . . ..................2256.5.1 Operator Controls ..............................2266.5.2 Indicators...................................2266.5.3 Operation...................................2266.5.3.1 Charging the EP10 Battery.....................2266.5.3.2 Charging a Spare Battery......................2276.5.3.3 Operating the USB Dock......................2276.5.4 Cleaning the RV4000.............................2286.5.5 Troubleshooting ...............................2296.5.5.1 Docking Station does not Power On................2296.5.5.2 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Stays Off...............2296.5.5.3 EP10 Charge LED Fast Flashes Green...............2296.5.5.4 Dock Battery LED Fast Flashes Green with Battery Inserted . . .2296.5.5.5 Dock Battery LED does not Turn On when Battery is Inserted . .2296.6 Quad Docking Station – Model No. RV4004 . . . ..................2306.6.1 Operator Controls ..............................2306.6.2 Indicators...................................2306.6.3 Quad Dock Operation ............................2316.6.3.1 Charging the EP10 Battery.....................2316.6.3.2 Connecting to the Ethernet Network ................2316.6.4 Cleaning the RV4004.............................232Preliminary Draft
216 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual6.6.5 Troubleshooting ...............................2336.6.5.1 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Stays Off ..............2336.6.5.2 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Fast Flashes Green .........2336.6.5.3 Green LED OFF When Connected to a Network.........2336.6.5.4 Yellow LED OFF When Connected to a 100Base-T Network . . 2336.6.5.5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off.................2336.7 Quad Charger – Model No. RV3004 .........................2336.7.1 Charging the EP10 Battery.........................2336.7.2 Installation..................................2336.7.3 Operator Controls..............................2346.7.4 Charge Indicators..............................2346.7.5 Charging Batteries..............................2356.7.6 Troubleshooting ...............................2356.7.6.1 Improper Battery Storage .....................2356.7.6.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up..................2356.7.6.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed.........2356.8 Snap Modules .....................................2366.9 AC Wall Adaptor – Model No. PS1050-G1......................2376.10 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor – Model No. RV3050 . . . .............2376.11 The Non-Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1000 . .............2386.11.1 Important Instructions...........................2396.11.2 Vehicle Cradle Operation .........................2396.11.2.1 Operator Controls.........................2396.11.2.2 Indicators.............................2396.11.2.3 Placing the EP10 in the Vehicle Cradle..............2396.11.2.4 Removing the EP10 from the Vehicle Cradle ..........2406.11.3 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . . .............2406.11.3.1 Mounting Template ........................2406.11.4 Cleaning the RV1000 Vehicle Cradle ...................2426.12 The Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1005 .................2426.12.1 RV1005 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . . . .......2446.12.1.1 Mounting Template........................2456.12.2 Cable Arrangement ............................2456.12.3 Electrical Requirements..........................2456.12.3.1 Wiring Vehicle Power to the Cradle...............2466.12.4 USB and Serial Connections........................2476.12.5 Using the Vehicle Cradle..........................248Preliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2176.12.6 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle.......................2486.13 EA11 Imager .....................................2496.13.1 Operating Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers.................2496.14 Bluetooth Peripherals.................................2506.15 Digital Camera....................................251Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesCarrying AccessoriesEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2196.1 Carrying AccessoriesThere are a variety of carrying accessories to help the operator work safely and comfortably with the EP10.6.1.1 The Hand Strap with Tether – Model No. RV6021The hand strap with tether can be attached to the back of the EP10 to provide a secure means for operators to carry the hand-held.Attaching the Hand StrapThe hand strap is attached by fixing the ends of the strap to the anchors located on the back and bottom of the unit (see Figure 6.1 on page 220).Carrying Accessory Model NumberHand Straps RV6021 (with stylus and tether) - PN TBDCarrying Pouch RV6090 leather pouch (non-functional access to DC port, in-cludes belt clip TBD model no. & functional or non-functional)Stylus Tether Kit RV6020 (model no. TBD) stylus and tether)Important: Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on carrying accesso-ries. These chemicals may damage the plastic casing.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesThe Hand Strap with Tether – Model No. RV6021220 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualFigure 6.1  Attaching The Hand Strap 1. Attach the hand strap to the EP10 by looping the Velcro tab around the pin and adhering the tab to the Velcro pad (TBD).2. Remove the bracket and screws from the EP10.3. Slide the bracket through the plastic loop on the hand strap and install the screws.4. Adjust the hand strap by pulling up the Velcro tab and readjusting to your hand as needed.Attaching the Stylus and TetherThe stylus tether can be attached to the hand strap at the back of the EP10.(TBD)1. If not assembled, thread the tether cord through the stylus as shown, pulling the cord tight.2. Thread the tether through the eyelet on the strap.3. Pass the stylus through the tether loop and pull the tether snug.4. Slip the stylus into the elastic holder, and you’re finished.Back of EP10Hand Strap BarHand Strap AnchorPreliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesAttaching the Tether – Model No. RV6020EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2216.1.2 Attaching the Tether – Model No. RV6020The tether can be installed to the back of the EP10 to provide a secure means for attaching the stylus to the hand-held. (TBD)Figure 6.2  Attaching the TetherAttaching the Velcro RetainerAttach the retainer to the EP10 by looping the Velcro tab around the pin and adhering the tab to the Velcro pad (TBD).BACK OF UNITStylusPLACE HOLDERPreliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesCarrying Pouch222 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAttaching the Stylus Tether to the Retainer1. If not assembled, thread the tether cord through the stylus as shown, pulling the cord tight.2. Thread the tether through the eyelet on the strap.3. Pass the stylus through the tether loop and pull the tether snug.4. Slip the stylus into the elastic holder, and you’re finished.6.1.3 Carrying PouchA protective carrying pouch (Model No. TBD) is available for EP10. The pouch is equipped with a belt clip to allow the operator to safely carry the EP10 when it is not in use.Figure 6.3  EP10 Carrying Pouch6.2 The BatteryThe EP10 operates with a 3600 mAh, Lithium-Ion battery pack.Back of PouchBelt ClipNote:  For information about inserting, removing and charging the battery, refer to “The Battery” on page 12. For battery specifications, refer to “Lithium-Ion 3600 mAh Battery Specifications” on page 265. Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesAdaptor Cable OptionsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2236.3 Adaptor Cable OptionsThe following are adaptors can be ordered for your EP10 (PN TBD):6.4 Chargers and Docking StationsPsion Teklogix offers a variety of chargers and docking stations for the EP10. These include:• Snap Modules are mobile adaptor designed for the EP10. Two models are available – USB and Charge Snap Module, Model RV4001 and DE9 RS232 and Charge Snap Module, Model RV4002.• AC Adaptor – Model PS1050 - G1 (AC Wall Adaptor Brick RV3055)• Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor – Model RV3050• Desktop Docking Station – Model RV4000• Quad Docking Station – Model RV4004• Quad Charger – Model 30046.4.1 Important Safety Instructions• Before using the AC adaptor, Desktop Docking Station, Quad Charger, or Quad Docking Station, read all instructions and markings on the housing.• Use the AC adaptor, batteries, and other attachments recommended or sold by Psion Teklogix.• The mains power cord (sold separately) shall comply with the national safety regula-tions of the country where the equipment is to be used.• These docking stations cannot be used with non-EP10 PDAs. Although they may share the same battery terminating connector, they are designed with different applications in mind.Model Number Adaptor Cable DescriptionCA1033 Tether to USB Host. CA1032 Tether to USB Device. (For ActiveSync)WA4010 - G1 USB to Ethernet adaptor.CH1050 Power cable used with quad docking station RV4004.Important: Keep in mind when ordering a charger or docking station, you must also order the appropriate power cord separately.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesInstallation: Chargers and Docking Stations224 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Do not operate the AC adaptor with a damaged cord or plug. Replace immediately.• Do not disassemble the AC adaptor; it should be repaired by qualified service personnel. Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire.• To reduce the risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging a docking station, pull the plug rather than the cord.• Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on, tripped over, or otherwise subjected to damage or stress.• Do not operate the AC adaptor, the RV4000, or the RV4004, if it is struck by a sharp blow, dropped, or otherwise damaged in any way; it should be inspected by qualified service personnel.• To reduce the risk of electric shock, unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning.• An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Use of an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock. If an extension cord must be used, make sure:- The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number, size, and shape as those on the adaptor.- The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition, and that the wire size is larger than 18 AWG.• Do not expose the AC adaptor to rain or snow. However, both the RV4000 and RV4004 are designed to accept a wet EP10 hand-held without harmful effect.• Do not place batteries in the docking stations if they are cold—temperatures below 0°C (32°F). Allow them to warm up to room temperature for at least 30 minutes.• Do not use a docking station if after an overnight charge, the battery feels warmer than the charger housing. The dock should be inspected by qualified service personnel.• Do not use a docking station if the battery, while charging, becomes more than lukewarm.6.4.2 Installation: Chargers and Docking StationsWhen installing a charger or docking station, consider the following guidelines. • Keep chargers and docking stations away from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants. • Chargers will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 0° C to 40 °C (32° F to 104° F). It is recommended that the charger or docking station be operated at room temperature–between 18° C and 25° C (64° F to 77° F) for maximum performance.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesPower Consumption ConsiderationsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 225After unpacking your unit:• Visually inspect the charger for possible damage.• Install the IEC power cord and apply power. 6.4.3 Power Consumption ConsiderationsCheck to ensure the mains circuit supplying chargers and/or docking stations is adequate for the load, especially if several chargers and docking stations are being powered from the same circuit. • Quad docking station can consume up to 1.9A @ 120 VAC or 1.5 A @ 240 VAC.6.5 Desktop Docking Station – Model No. RV4000The RV4000 desktop docking station is a desktop model designed to:• Fast charge the internal battery.• Fast charge the spare battery pack (see Figure 6.4 on page 226)• Supply Type A and Type B USB connectivity to the EP10 (see Figure 6.5 on page 228).The RV4000 storage temperature is -30° C to +60° C (-22° F to 140° F). Operating tempera-ture and humidity are: 5 - 95% non-condensing and 0° C to 40°C (32° F to 104° F).The desktop docking station provides sufficient power to concurrently support all the above functions. The RV4000 uses careful charge algorithms designed to maximize battery life while ensuring the shortest possible charge time. The charger supports proprietary Psion Teklogix Smart Batteries and handles a range of voltages and charge algorithms. See “The Battery” on page 12 for battery capacity, charge times and battery life for the EP10 battery. See “Charging a Spare Battery” on page 227 for spare battery charge information.Important: The RV4000 desktop docking station is shipped with its own user manual. It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.Note: To preserve battery integrity, the desktop docking station will proceed with a charge only when the battery temperature falls between 0° C and 40° C (32° F to 104° F).Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesOperator Controls226 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualFigure 6.4  RV4000 Desktop Docking Station – Front View6.5.1 Operator ControlsThe RV4000 has one operator control – the USB door on the rear that switches from Type A to Type B (see “Operating the USB Dock” on page 227).6.5.2 IndicatorsThe RV4000 desktop docking station is equipped with a single LED on the front panel that indicates the charge status of the spare battery.6.5.3 Operation6.5.3.1 Charging the EP10 BatteryThe RV4000 supplies DC power to enable the EP10 internal fast charger. Normally, it takes 2.5 to 3.0 hours to charge the 3600 mAh battery installed in the EP10.When the EP10 hand-held is installed in the dock, the battery charge LED on the EP10 (the left-most LED) lights up to indicate the unit has external power and may charge the internal battery. The EP10 charge LED follows the same convention as the RV4000 docking station Rear-Mounted Spare BatterySpare Battery Charge LEDStylusPLACE HOLDERImportant: This docking station can only be used to charge Psion Teklogix approved Lithium-Ion batteries.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesOperationEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 227LED. Refer to “Charging a Spare Battery” in the next section for details about LED behaviour.6.5.3.2 Charging a Spare Battery• Insert the spare battery in the charge well at the back of the RV4000, aligning the con-tacts on the battery with the contacts in the spare battery charge well.A full charge takes 2.5 to 3.0 hours for the 3600 mAh battery.When the battery capacity reaches 95%, the LED turns solid green and remains in this state once the battery is completely charged. 6.5.3.3 Operating the USB DockThe RV4000 Desktop Docking Station offers a rear-mounted host or device USB connection to the EP10. The EP10 supports communication with low- and full-speed USB 1.1 compli-ant devices and hosts through the docking station. The Type B receptacle may be used for ActiveSync® among other applications typical for a Type B device (Figure 6.5 on page 228).• Move the sliding door to the left or right to alternate between the Type A and Type B USB ports.Note: Battery charging continues whether the EP10 is switched on or off.Note: Do not store a spare battery in a charger for more than 72 hours. Doing so may damage the battery or reduce its charge capacity.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesCleaning the RV4000228 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualFigure 6.5  RV4000 Desktop Docking Station Rear ViewLinking an EP10 to a PCThe desktop docking station can be connected to a PC so that you can exchange files in the same way that you would between PC drives. A USB cable is included with your docking station.To link the EP10 to a PC:• Insert the EP10 in the desktop docking station.• Insert the USB cable into the docking station Type B USB connector. Attach the other end of the cable to a USB port on the PC.6.5.4 Cleaning the RV4000Typ e  A U S B  Por t DC JackSliding DoorDC JackSliding DoorType B USB PortNote: For details about data transfer through Windows XP and ActiveSync and through Vista, refer to “Data Transfer Between the PC & the EP10” on page 17.Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesTro ub le sho ot in gEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 229• Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the RV4000. Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals. It is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline and slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.• To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol. 6.5.5 Troubleshooting 6.5.5.1 Docking Station does not Power On• When first connected to the DC power supply, the spare charger LED should turn ON and remain on for 3 seconds. If this does not occur, the charger is defective and requires service.6.5.5.2 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Stays OffWhen an EP10 is docked into a powered RV4000 and the EP10 charge indicator LED stays off, there may be a problem with the unit or with the docking station. Use an EP10 with a properly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem.6.5.5.3 EP10 Charge LED Fast Flashes GreenIf the EP10 charge LED (the left-most LED) fast flashes green when it is docked:• Remove the EP10 and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable. • Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again. • If the EP10 LED still shows a fault, the EP10 requires service.6.5.5.4 Dock Battery LED Fast Flashes Green with Battery Inserted• Try inserting a battery that has been tested in another charger and is known to work.• If the spare charge slot LED continues to fast flash green with the known working bat-tery, the charger is defective and requires service.•Your Psion Teklogix battery and desktop docking station are carefully designed for safety and capacity performance in accordance with IEEE 1725. If the battery or charger are not Psion Teklogix approved products, or the safety mechanism is faulty, the spare charge slot LED or EP10 LED will rapidly flash green.6.5.5.5 Dock Battery LED does not Turn On when Battery is Inserted• Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage. Are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken?• Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the slot. • Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesQuad Docking Station – Model No. RV4004230 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Disconnect and reconnect the DC adaptor, and check that the spare battery LED indica-tor flashes at power-up. • If the charge slot fails to charge the known working battery, it is defective and requires service.6.6 Quad Docking Station – Model No. RV4004The RV4004 Quad Docking Station is a desktop model designed to accept up to four EP10 PDAs. The docking station powers the EP10s and their internal battery charger. The docking station also connects from one to four EP10s to a 10/100 Base-T Ethernet network and allows for Ethernet data transfer. Figure 6.6  RV4004 Quad Docking Station Front View6.6.1 Operator ControlsThe RV4004 has no operator controls or power switch.6.6.2 IndicatorsThe quad docking station is equipped with two rear Ethernet LEDs and no front LEDs.Important: The RV4000 desktop docking station is shipped with its own user manual. It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.PLACE HOLDERPreliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesQuad Dock OperationEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2316.6.3 Quad Dock Operation6.6.3.1 Charging the EP10 Battery• Insert the DC power MINI FIT JR plug into the RV4004 rear DC input receptacle. The adaptor LED should be ON when powered from the mains.The RV4004 supplies DC power to enable the EP10 internal fast charger. Normally, a full charge of the 3600 mAh EP10 battery will take from 2.5 to 3.0 hours.• Insert up to four EP10s into the docking station charge wells, pressing down gently but firmly to seat them securely.• During the charge, the EP10 LED slow flashes green.• When the battery capacity reaches 95%, the LED turns solid green.6.6.3.2 Connecting to the Ethernet NetworkThe rear-mounted RJ45 connector incorporates LEDs that indicate data traffic (see Figure 6.7) when:• The EP10 is in the docking station and powered on;• The docking station is powered by the AC adaptor;• The docking station is connected to Ethernet network with a Category 5 cable plugged into the RJ45 rear socket.The green Link LED flashes to indicate the presence of data traffic. The yellow Speed LED is steady ON when the network is 100 Mbps and OFF when the network is 10 Mbps.Note: Battery charging continues whether the EP10 is switched on or off.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesCleaning the RV4004232 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualFigure 6.7  RV4004 Quad Docking Station Rear ViewNetwork AccessThe EP10 automatically detects insertion into the docking station and loads the appropriate drivers to communicate with the network.Network AddressingThe host application uses standard TCP/IP protocol to name, locate and communicate with a specific EP10 on the network. If a link is established between an EP10 and a host, the application on the host and on the EP10 must have a recovery mechanism in the event that the EP10 is removed from the dock, interrupting the link.6.6.4 Cleaning the RV4004• Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the RV4004. Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.• To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol. RJ45 Ethernet PortMINI FIT JR DC InputSpeed LEDLink LEDPLACE HOLDERImportant: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesTro ub le sho ot in gEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2336.6.5 Troubleshooting6.6.5.1 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Stays OffWhen an EP10 is docked into a powered RV4004 and its charge indicator LED stays off, there could be a problem with the EP10 or with the docking station. Use an EP10 with a properly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem.6.6.5.2 EP10 Charge Indicator LED Fast Flashes GreenIf the EP10 charge indicator fast flashes green when the EP10 is in any of the four sites:• Remove the EP10s and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable. • Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again. • If the EP10 indicator still shows a fault, the EP10 requires service.6.6.5.3 Green LED OFF When Connected to a Network• Check the Category 5/5e cable. Replace if the cable is suspect.• Contact your network administrator. 6.6.5.4 Yellow LED OFF When Connected to a 100Base-T Network• Check the Ethernet cable. Replace if the cable is suspect. • Contact your network administrator to ensure the network is running at 100 Mbps. 6.6.5.5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off• Check the AC cable. Replace with the same type if the cable is suspect.• If the adaptor's LED stays OFF, the adaptor is defective and requires service.6.7 Quad Charger – Model No. RV30046.7.1 Charging the EP10 BatteryQuad Battery Charger (Model No. RV3004) can charge up to four batteries simultaneously.6.7.2 InstallationThe charger can be wall mounted using the wall mount kit (MT2031TBD) or it can be oper-ated on a flat surface. Install the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants. The ambient temperature must be in the range 5°C to 39°C (41°F to 102°F) (TBD). The charger will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range. For Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesOperator Controls234 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manualmaximum performance, it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperature – a temperature range between 18°C to 25°C (64°F to 77°F).The charger can consume up to 6 A at 120 VAC, 3A at 240 VAC. Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying the charger is adequate for this loading (especially if several chargers are being powered from the same circuit). After unpacking the unit:• Visually check the charger for damage. • Install the IEC power cord and apply power. All charge indicators flash momentarily at powerup to indicate that the charger is ready for operation.If you choose to wall mount the charger, detailed installation instructions are included in the EP10 Quad Charger Quick Start Guide (PN TBD) included with the charger kit. Be sure to locate the charger in an area where there is no risk of injury to persons walking in the vicinity.6.7.3 Operator ControlsThe gang charger does not have operator controls or a power switch. There is no dedicated indicator light to show that the charger is powered, but the charge slot LEDs will light.6.7.4 Charge IndicatorsEach battery charge slot is equipped with four LEDs to indicate the charge status of the bat-tery. When the EP10 batteries are inserted in the charger, the colour and behaviour of the LEDs associated with the charge wells in use indicate the status of the charge.Table 6.1  Charge Status Indicator LEDsImportant: Use IEC-320 C13 power cords approved by Psion Teklogix, with the ground pin connected to a proper earth-grounded receptacle. Check with a quali-fied electrician if you are uncertain of your receptacle grounding.Charge LED Behaviour FunctionOFF No battery detected.Solid Green Battery charging complete. Each LED represents 25% battery capacity.Flashing Green Charge in progress. Each LED represents 25% battery capacity.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesCharging BatteriesEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2356.7.5 Charging Batteries• Install the battery with the battery contacts facing the charger. Slide the battery between the guide rails until it lightly latches in place. The 4-LED bar for the battery bay shows 25% charger per LED. A flashing green LED shows charging is under way. The LED directly below the slot in which a battery is inserted lights up immediately. If the battery temperature is outside 5°C to 39°C (41°F to 102°F), the LED flashes yellow until the temperature is acceptable. A fully discharged battery will nor-mally take from 3 to 4 hours to charge. At full capacity, it turns solid green.When the battery is fully charged, the charger stops applying power; the battery cannot be overcharged if left in the charger slot. 6.7.6 Troubleshooting6.7.6.1 Improper Battery StorageStoring batteries in the gang charger for extended periods (more than a week or two) is not recommended. Lithium-ion batteries lose capacity if they are maintained at full charge for long periods of time. See the battery handling recommendations in “The Battery” on page 12.6.7.6.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up• Remove all batteries, and unplug the charger. • Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power. • Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for damage.• Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet. 6.7.6.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed• Remove the battery, and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge slot. • Reinstall the battery, and check that it is fully seated in the slot.• Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken).• Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot. Flashing Yellow Battery is not charging due to out-of-temperature conditions.Solid Red Unable to read battery or non Psion Teklogix battery.Charge LED Behaviour FunctionPreliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesSnap Modules236 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Reconnect the mains power cable, and check that the slot indicator flashes at powerup.6.8 Snap ModulesThe Snap Module is a mobile power adaptor that snaps on the base of the EP10. Two types of Snap Modules are available:• USB and Charge Snap Module – Model No. RV4001. This accessory powers and charges the EP10, and it provides a USB connection.• DE9 RS232 and Charge Snap Module – Model No. RV4002. This accessory powers and charges the EP10 and provides a RS232 connection.The Snap Modules are compatible with the AC Wall Adaptor and the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor. To attach an adaptor to the EP10:• Make sure that the adaptor connector and EP10 docking connector are free of dust or any other debris before connecting them.• A slot in the side rail on each side of the hand-held accommodates the locking clips of the adaptor. To attach the adaptor, align it with the base of the hand-held and gently slide up until the locking clips snap into place. Refer to TBD illustration. • To remove the adaptor, press down on the base of the clip arms to release them from the EP10 side rails and slide the adaptor off.PLACE HOLDERSnap Module installation illustrationPreliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesAC Wall Adaptor – Model No. PS1050-G1EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2376.9 AC Wall Adaptor – Model No. PS1050-G1The AC wall adaptor available for your EP10 allows you to operate your EP10 using AC power while charging the battery inserted in the unit.Adaptor plugs suitable for use in the following countries are shipped with the AC wall adap-tor: United Kingdom, Switzerland, Japan, Israel, Australia, Europe, and North America (see Figure 6.8 on page 237).Figure 6.8  AC Wall Adaptor Plugs• Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country. Slide the adaptor plug into the Universal AC power supply, snapping it into place. These two pieces, coupled together, are referred to as an AC wall adaptor.• Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN port at the base of the EP10, located between the tether and LIF ports.• Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet.6.10 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor – Model No. RV3050The vehicle power outlet adaptor allows you to power your EP10 and recharge your battery using power drawn from your vehicle’s power outlet.Universal AC Power SupplyAdaptor PlugsDC Power PlugsImportant: It is critical that you review the safety instructions outlined in the quick start guide enclosed with your vehicle power adaptor before using the accessory.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesThe Non-Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1000238 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualFigure 6.9  Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor • Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN port at the base of a snap module – Model No. RV4001 or RV4002 (see TBD).• Insert the vehicle power outlet adaptor plug into the power outlet in your vehicle.6.11 The Non-Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1000The RV1000 vehicle cradle is a passive device, designed to securely grip the EP10. The cradle design permits access for the DC input cable to connect to the EP10 (see Figure 6.10 on page 239).• A stylus holder.• A loop for tethering the stylus.• A cable tidy for draping the power cables or storing the disconnected DC plug.DC Power PlugVehicle PowerAdaptor PlugNote: Shock and vibration specifications for the EP10 are verified using Psion Teklogix-approved RAM mounts and mounting hardware. Use of non-certified Psion Teklogix mounting hardware is not recommended, and may void warranty coverage.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesImportant InstructionsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 239Figure 6.10 RV1000 Vehicle Cradle6.11.1 Important InstructionsThe RV1000 storage temperature is -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F). Operating humidity and temperature is 5 - 95% non-condensing and -30°C to 60°C (-22°F to 140°F).6.11.2 Vehicle Cradle Operation6.11.2.1 Operator ControlsThe vehicle cradle has no operator controls or power switch.6.11.2.2 IndicatorsThe RV1000 has no front indicators. The EP10 LED serves as the power indicator.6.11.2.3 Placing the EP10 in the Vehicle CradleConnect the vehicle power to the EP10 prior to inserting it in the vehicle cradle.The vehicle cradle is designed with a front opening through which you can pass the con-nected cable while inserting the EP10 (see Figure 6.10 on page 239). When placing the EP10 into the vehicle cradle, press firmly on the top of the hand-held and the EP10 will bottom out on the cradle base. This action will make the final fit to the cradle base to allow the rear restraining mechanism to resist vibration. Cable Tidy Restraining Mechanisms Stylus WellCable Pass-thruPLACE HOLDERPreliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesVehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations240 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual6.11.2.4 Removing the EP10 from the Vehicle CradleWhen removing the EP10, apply slight pressure to the rear and pull upwards. The rear-first motion will assist in disengaging the rear restraining mechanism.6.11.3 Vehicle Cradle Mounting RecommendationsPedestal mounts are recommended for all fixed mount locations because they offer optimal operator access. In addition, for safety reasons, only pedestal mounts with fully locking joints should be used in vehicles. Always adjust the pedestal for the optimum viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws.The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle RAM mount is to use the seven #M4 threaded inserts on the rear of the unit. Bolts must not extend more than 5mm into the vehicle cradle. You may also remove the rear Ram-B mount accessory to custom mount the vehicle cradle to a surface other than the recommended RAM-B (Figure 6.11 on page 241).6.11.3.1 Mounting TemplateThe vehicle cradle is shipped with detailed mounting instructions including a drill template. Refer to the RV1000 EP10 Hand-Held Vehicle Cradle Quick Start Guide (PN 8000234).In every case, please take the following precautions:1. When installing the cradle, ensure the driver's view is not obstructed. Warning: Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle, there are a number of opera-tor safety issues that require careful attention. An improperly mounted cradle may result in one or more of the following: operator injury, operator visibility obstruction, operator distraction and/or poor ease of egress for the operator. Psion Teklogix strongly recommends that you seek professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer.Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration, espe-cially for separately tethered scanners and other devices with loose cables. If you are unable to obtain suitable advice, contact Psion Teklogix for assist-ance (see Appendix A: “Summit Client Utility (SCU)”. Note also that for better protection, the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage.Important:  EP10 vehicle cradles are designed to be compatible with any RAM®-B mounting interface. For other mounting options please contact our Techni-cal Support offices.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesVehicle Cradle Mounting RecommendationsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2412. Install cradles so as not to obstruct vehicle safety features, i.e. air bags, seat belts, etc.3. Ensure cradle is secured to the vehicle in a safe location. Injury may result otherwise.4. Ensure the mounting has the capacity to hold the cradle and the EP10. Cradle plus EP10 weight is approximately 1kg (2.2 lb.).5. Psion Teklogix has recommended and approved mounts. Consult Psion Teklogix Customer Service for direction.Figure 6.11 Removing the RAM MountTo accommodate the service loop of the power cable, leave a 10.2 cm (4 in.) clearance at the bottom of the vehicle cradle. Leave a 17.8 cm (7 in.) clearance at the top of the vehicle cradle to allow easy removal of the EP10. When selecting a mounting location, refer to the detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the pedestal. If you choose to use a third party company-produced cradle, Psion Teklogix cannot take re-sponsibility for the effects of that third party product when it causes failure to our device. PLACE HOLDERImportant: Before Psion Teklogix releases a product, our engineering team exposes that product to vibration tests to ensure the EP10 will remain secure during normal use. But as a low cost mount, the cradle will not defend against shock if the vehicle undergoes a front or rear impact. Take care to mount the cradle in an upright position in case of accidents.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesCleaning the RV1000 Vehicle Cradle242 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual6.11.4 Cleaning the RV1000 Vehicle Cradle• Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the RV1000. Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.• To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol.6.12 The Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1005The RV1005 Powered Vehicle Cradle (12-24 VDC) is designed to securely grip the EP10 when locked in and provides an easy single-handed release mechanism when the EP10 needs to be quickly removed from the cradle. The cradle design permits access for the DC input cable to connect to the EP10 (see Figure 6.15 on page 248). The cradle is also equipped with: • One USB A connector.• LED charge indicator.• A stylus holder and tether latch.• Built in speaker, identical to the one on EP10, that offers hands-free functionality. The powered cradle detects when the EP10 is docked and can automatically transfer the speaker function from the EP10 to the cradle.• Depending on the cradle variant, there can be up to two full RS-232 connectors.- PN 1081148-500: no RS-232 connectors.- PN 1081148-400: one RS-232 connector.- PN 1081148-200: two RS-232 connectors.The cradle comes with four mounting screws and a RV1005 Powered Cradle Quick Start Guide (PN 8000164), with illustrated electrical and mounting instructions.Before Psion Teklogix releases a product, our engineering team exposes that product through a series of severe testing to ensure that it will survive in the rugged environments in which our products are typically used. These tests usually include shock and vibration testing as well as IP testing for water and dust, electrical shock, etc.If a third party vehicle mount is used, the third party should perform the same type of testing in order to ensure that the design will maintain the factory specifications of the product. If the third party company is unwilling to perform the necessary testing and take responsibility Important: Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesThe Powered Vehicle Cradle – Model No. RV1005EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 243for the effects of the design, then we highly recommend using Psion Teklogix designed and supported accessories.If you elect to use a third party company produced cradle, Psion Teklogix cannot take re-sponsibility for the effects of that third party product if it causes failure of our device.Figure 6.12 RV1005A Front ViewImportant: Before using a vehicle cradle, read all instructions and markings on the housing.Do not operate a vehicle cradle if damaged by a sharp blow, dropped, or otherwise damaged in any way; qualified service personnel should inspect for internal damage.Shock and vibration specifications for the EP10 are verified using Psion Teklogix-approved RAM® mounts and mounting hardware. Use of non-certified Psion Teklogix mounting hardware is not recommended, and may void warranty coverage.Do not expose to rain or snow! However, the Powered Vehicle Cradle is designed to accept a wet EP10 handheld without harmful effect.This Powered Vehicle Cradle cannot be used with non- EP10 cradle accessories. Stylus WellDC Power LEDSpeakerDockingConnectorLatchesPLACE HOLDERPreliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesRV1005 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations244 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual6.12.1 RV1005 Vehicle Cradle Mounting RecommendationsThe EP10 Powered Vehicle Cradle is designed to be compatible with any RAM-B mounting interface.The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle RAM mount is to use the four #M4X12 threaded inserts on the rear of the unit (see Figure 6.13). Bolts are supplied with the cradle and must not extend more than 7 mm into the vehicle cradle.Figure 6.13 RV1005 Rear ViewImportant: Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle, there are a number of opera-tor safety issues that require careful attention. An improperly mounted vehicle cradle may result in one or more of the following: operator injury, operator visibility obstruction, operator distraction and/or poor ease of egress for the operator. Psion Teklogix strongly recommends that you seek professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer.Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration, especially for separately tethered scanners and other devices with loose cables. If you are unable to obtain suitable advice, contact Psion Teklogix for assistance.In addition, for safety reasons, only pedestal mounts with fully locking joints should be used in vehicles. Always adjust the pedestal for the optimum viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws.#M4X10 Threaded InsertsCradleMounting BaseStylus Tether RingDC Power PortPLACE HOLDERPreliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesCable ArrangementEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 245If you wish to custom mount the vehicle cradle to a surface other than the recommended RAM-B, please take the following precautions:• When installing the cradle, ensure the driver’s view is not obstructed.• Install cradles so as not to obstruct vehicle safety features, i.e. air bags, seat belts, etc.• Ensure cradle is secured to the vehicle in a safe location. Injury may result otherwise.• Ensure the mounting has capacity to hold the cradle and EP10. Cradle plus EP10 weight is approximately 1.3 kg.• Psion Teklogix has recommended and approved mounts—consult Customer Service for instructions.To accommodate the service loop of the connecting cable, leave a 10 cm clearance at the bottom of the vehicle cradle. Leave a 17 cm clearance at the top of the vehicle cradle to allow easy removal of the EP10. Refer to the detailed assembly instructions that are pack-aged with the pedestal when selecting a mounting location.6.12.1.1 Mounting TemplateFor detailed mounting instructions including a drill template, refer to the RV1005 EP10 Hand-Held Vehicle Cradle Quick Reference Guide (PN 8000165 TBD).6.12.2 Cable ArrangementBefore installing cables between the cradle and other devices, review the following:• Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring.• Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage.• Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal.• Use plastic straps and tie-downs to secure cables and connectors in their desired loca-tion, away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled.• Keep cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid and other potential hazards.• Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle.6.12.3 Electrical RequirementsThe Powered Vehicle Cradle is designed to allow the EP10 to be powered by a vehicle bat-tery. The battery installed in the EP10 is also recharged by the vehicle battery system. Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesElectrical Requirements246 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual6.12.3.1 Wiring Vehicle Power to the CradleThe Powered Vehicle Cradle uses the vehicle power outlet or the vehicle fuse box to power from the vehicle battery system. The Vehicle Outlet Power Adaptor (Model No. RV3050) is used for the vehicle power outlet; the Power Extension cable (PN 1081146) is used for the vehicle fuse box.Figure 6.14 Vehicle Outlet Power Adaptor and Power Extension CablePower cables are equipped with fuses and instructions are supplied with each cable. Use only a 4A slow blow Safety-approved fuse in the fuse assembly.These cables should only supply operating power from the vehicle to the Powered Vehicle Cradle from 12VDC or 24VDC systems. Warning: Applying a voltage above 36VDC or reversing polarity may result in perma-nent damage to the vehicle cradle power section and will void the product warranty. For safety reasons, disconnect the vehicle cradle power cable when the vehicle battery is being charged by an source other than the vehicle alternator.Warning: A properly trained technician must perform the power connection using Power Extension cable (PN 1081146) and the RV1005. Improper connection can damage the vehicle or the cradle.This cable can be used to provide power to RV1005 from a fused circuit. The vehicle cradle should be added to a fused circuit with a new maximum load capacity of the original load plus the cradle load, which is 4A.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesUSB and Serial ConnectionsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 247• The Powered Vehicle Cradle draws no more than 1.9 A @ 12 VDC or 0.95 A @ 24 VDC. Any additional wiring, connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 4A. The Powered Vehicle Cradle and peripherals can be used with both negative ground systems when using the Power Extension cable. Peripheral wiring should be closely examined to avoid ground loops in positive ground systems.• There is the option of connecting power to the cradle before or after the ‘key’ switch.- It is preferable to wire after the key switch. In this configuration, when the key is turned ON, the vehicle will power the cradle and docked EP10, charging the internal battery when needed. When the vehicle ignition is OFF, the EP10 docked in the cradle will run on its internal battery.- However, if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift, it may make more sense to wire the vehicle cradle before the switch. In this case, the EP10 will always operate from vehicle power and that power will charge the battery when needed.- Keep in mind that the EP10 will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as long as the internal battery has sufficient charge.6.12.4 USB and Serial ConnectionsThe Powered Vehicle Cradle full configuration consists of two serial DE-9M ports and one USB Type A port located at the base of the product. These are COM and USB ports that allow the communication of serial and USB devices with the EP10. These ports are:• One powered USB A (Host).• One full Serial port.• One Serial port that provides power over pin 9. This port is located nearest the front LED and is marked as COM 6 in Figure 6.15.Important: Depending on the configuration, the RV1005 Powered Vehicle Cradle has up to three data connectors and one power connector.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesUsing the Vehicle Cradle248 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualFigure 6.15 RV1005 PortsPeripherals such as scanners, printers, GPS, etc., may be used with the EP10 and the cradle. Check with Psion Teklogix if there is any compatibility issue with the device you want to use with the EP10 and the cradle. 6.12.5 Using the Vehicle CradleIf your EP10 is equipped with a shoulder strap or protective cover, these accessories need to be removed before installing the unit in a vehicle cradle. There is no need to remove hand straps or tethered devices from the unit.• Slide the EP10 into the cradle, and press firmly downward to the point where resistance is met. Press the EP10 down through the resistance until it bottoms in the cradle – the locks on the latches will engage. This can be one smooth motion if you wish. Electrical contact will not be made until the EP10 is fully inserted. On a vehicle, it’s a good idea to pull up on the EP10 to be certain that it is secure.• To remove the unit, push the latches upwards – the EP10 will be released so that it can be removed.6.12.6 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle• Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean.• Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the vehicle cradle.• Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents, or strong chemicals for cleaning.• The vehicle cradle has a plastic case and stamped logo that is susceptible to harsh chem-icals. The plastic and stamping is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. They slowly decompose in strong alkaline solutions.Serial Port BSerial Port AUSB A (Host)PortDC Power Port(COM 5) (COM 6)PLACE HOLDERPreliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesEA11 ImagerEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 249• To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol.• The two-lock assembly in the Powered Vehicle Cradle holds the EP10 firmly in place. Although this mechanism is designed for at least 20,000 cycles, it will wear over time and will no longer lock the EP10 securely in the cradle. For replacement parts and instructions contact Psion Teklogix. Partial disassembly is required.6.13 EA11 ImagerThe EP10 hand-held supports the EA11 Decoded 2D imager. This imager can be configured using the Scanner Settings located under Settings>System>Teklogix Scanners (see “Scanner Settings” on page 150) and the Manage Triggers application (see “Manage Triggers” on page 133).It is critical that you review the safety information in the “EP10 Hand-Held Regulatory & Warranty Guide”, PN 8000235 before proceeding.6.13.1 Operating Two Dimensional (2D) ImagersAn imager takes a snap shot of a single bar code or multiple bar codes (at one time). It can find a bar code regardless of its orientation – that is, even a bar code printed at a 45 degree angle to the EP10 will be decoded successfully. Because imagers generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners, some practise may be required to find the optimal distance from the types of bar codes being scanned. Al-though the imager includes illumination LEDs, ambient light will help the imager decode the bar codes, especially if the bar code is far from the EP10.Note: When scanning multiple bar codes, ensure that all of the desired bar codes are within the field of view of the scanner. It is possible that even when all bar codes are within the field of view, not all of them will be decoded. Only successfully decoded bar codes are passed to the application program. The application program then issues a warning, asking that you scan the missing bar codes.When scanning a single bar code, ensure that only the desired bar code is within the field of view of the scanner.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesBluetooth Peripherals250 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual• Switch the EP10 on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.• Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger. Hold the trigger until a suc-cessful or failed scan result is obtained.• When the scan button or trigger is pressed, a red, oval shaped light (the framing marker) is displayed. Centre the framing marker in the field—either in the centre of the bar code you want to scan or in the centre of the area in which multiple bar codes are to be scanned.The illumination LEDs will flash (typically several times) and a picture of the bar code(s) is taken.6.14 Bluetooth PeripheralsThe EP10 is equipped with a Bluetooth radio, making it possible to communicate with a variety of Bluetooth peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scanners, printers and so on. Psion Teklogix provides built-in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below.• GSM/GPRS universal handset•Bluetooth printer•Bluetooth headsetKeep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802.11b/g radios both operate in the 2.4GHz band. Although the EP10 includes features to minimize interference, performance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously. Typically, when both radios operate in the EP10 at the same time, they cannot transmit simultaneously – this has a nega-tive impact on overall system throughput. To minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11g network, Psion Teklogix recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction rates (such as printers and scanners).Important: Keep in mind that the imager scanner is a camera, and the LED illumina-tion is a flash. Glare can be an issue on reflective media such as plastic coated bar codes, just as glare is an issue for photographers. When pointing at a shiny surface, either shift the bar code to the side or top, or angle the bar code so that the glare reflects away from the imager scanner.Most imagers take several ‘snap shots’ of the bar code in order to decode it. It is normal for the LEDs to flash two or three times. Hold the unit steady between flashes to improve decode performance. Preliminary Draft
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & AccessoriesDigital CameraEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 251Refer to “Bluetooth Setup” on page 172 for information about setting up your Bluetooth devices for communication. In addition, review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth device to determine the method used to pair with the EP10 host.6.15 Digital CameraThe EP10 can be equipped with an optional digital camera that can take still pictures or short video clips. Refer to “Pictures & Videos” on page 75 for details about using the camera.The Pictures & Videos applet allows the operator to activate the camera for still shots or video clips. It also provides a number of tools to crop photos, adjust picture contrast and brightness, zoom in and out of photos, and save your adjustments.Important: The “Pictures & Videos” program can only display .bmp or .jpg formats. Photos in other formats will need to be converted on your PC before they can be transferred to the EP10 hand-held.Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 253SPECIFICATIONS 77.1 EP10 Specifications – Model No. 7515 ........................2557.1.1 Hardware...................................2557.1.2 Software ...................................2567.1.3 Wireless Communication...........................2567.1.4 Power Management .............................2577.1.5 Expansion Slot................................2577.1.6 Bar Code Application ............................2577.1.7 Digital Camera................................2577.1.8 Voice Over IP (VOIP)............................2577.1.9 Accessories..................................2577.1.10 Approvals..................................2587.1.11 Environmental Specifications........................2587.2 Radio Specifications..................................2597.2.1 Murata 802.11 a/b/g/n Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Radio......2597.2.2 Murata Bluetooth Radio...........................2607.2.3 Sierra Wireless MC5728V . .........................2617.2.4 Cinterion PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio..................2637.3 Lithium-Ion 3600 mAh Battery Specifications ....................2657.4 Internal Imager.....................................2677.4.1 EA11 Decoded 2D Imager..........................2677.4.1.1 EA11 Typical Reading Distances..................268Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: SpecificationsEP10 Specifications – Model No. 7515EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2557.1  EP10 Specifications – Model No. 75157.1.1 HardwarePhysical Dimensions• Device: 6.2" x 3.1" x 1.2" (158 mm x 78 mm x 30.6 mm)Weight (with battery pack)• Weight with battery: 0.8 lb (336 g)User Interface• Display (Backlit)- 3.7 in. VGA portrait mode- Backlight feature 165 cd/m2 output- Sunlight readable with integrated touchscreen- Colour 480 x 640 graphic TFT- Passive stylus or finger operation• Audio- Built-in 85db mono speaker- microphone- receiver• Keyboard (Backlit)-QWERTY- High reliability keypad ultra-white backlight- Ergonomically enhanced for ambidextrous one-hand operation• Camera- 3.2 Mega Pixel Colour- Auto Focus- Dual LED Flash- Video capture capabilityNote: Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: SpecificationsSoftware256 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual7.1.2 SoftwarePlatform• AM3715 Processor• 800 MHz (ARM Cortex A8)• On-board RAM: 256 MB SDRAM• On-board ROM: 2 GB FlashOperating System• Microsoft Windows Embedded 6.5Programming Environment• HTML, XML• Mobile Devices SDK• JavaTM• Visual Studio® 2008• Standard protocol APIs - Windows® socketsApplication Software• Internet Explorer® Mobile included with Windows® Mobile® 6• Wordpad • ActiveSync• Mobile Control Center (MCC) device management7.1.3 Wireless Communication• On-board IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n• Bluetooth v2.1 radio (CCX V4 Certified- UMTS 3.5G HSPA radio options (TBD)- Integrated 5 band Antenna, supports both voice and data- SiRF starIV GPSNote: 802.11ab/g/n and Bluetooth are available simultaneously.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: SpecificationsPower ManagementEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2577.1.4 Power Management• Optional High Cap 3600 mAh Li-ion rechargeable battery• Full Shift operation•SMART battery• System backup (5 minutes) during battery swap7.1.5 Expansion Slot• One microSD slot7.1.6 Bar Code Application• 2D EA11 imager 7.1.7 Digital Camera• 3.2 mega pixel colour• Auto Focus• Dual LED Flash• Video capture capability7.1.8 Voice Over IP (VOIP)• Push-to-talk7.1.9  AccessoriesFor details about accessories available with the EP10, refer to Chapter 6: “Peripheral Devices & Accessories”.•Carrying Accessories:- Hand strap- Carrying case•Communications: - Quad dock (4-site) with 10/100 BaseT Ethernet and charge functions.Note: User upgradeable.Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: SpecificationsApprovals258 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual- Desktop dock with Type A and Type B USB connectivity and charge functions for an internal battery along with a spare battery.•Power supplies:- AC wall adaptor- Vehicle power outlet adaptor- Quad charger (4-site)- Snap Module: USB DE9M powered serial plus Charger- Snap Module: USB Host/Client plus Power/Charger•Vehicle peripherals:- Powered and Non-powered cradle- RAM Mount with screws7.1.10 Approvals• FCC Parts 15B, 15C, 15E, 22H, 24E, 27• IC RSS-210, RSS-132, RSS-133• EN 300 328, EN 301 489, EN 55022, EN55024, EN301 511, EN301 908, EN300 440, EN301 893• Safety IEC/EN 60950-1• Laser Safety IEC 60825-17.1.11 Environmental Specifications• Operating Temperature: 14ºF to 122 ºFC (-10ºC to +50ºC)• Storage Temperature: -4ºF to 140ºF (-20ºC to +65ºC)• Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% RH non-condensing• Rain & Dust Protection: IP54, IEC 529• Drop: 5 ft (1.5 m) - 26 drops to polished concrete• Tumble: 250 times at 0.5 m• ESD: +/- 15k Vdc air discharge, +/- 8k Vdc contactsPreliminary Draft
Chapter 7: SpecificationsRadio SpecificationsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2597.2 Radio Specifications7.2.1 Murata 802.11 a/b/g/n Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum RadioParameter Sub-parameters SpecificationsForm Factor Embedded surface mount module, 11.4 x 9.4 mm* This is a combo module containing both Wi-Fi802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth V2.1+EDR radioAntenna Port 802.11b/g/n U.FL jack. Non-diversity.Multiplexed between 802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz) andBluetooth radio802.11a/n U.FL jack. Non-diversity.Antenna Type 802.11b/g/n PIFA antenna. Covers 2400-2484 MHz@ <2.0:1 VSWR802.11a/n PIFA antenna. Covers 5150-5860 MHz@ <2.0:1 VSWRAntenna Gain 802.11b/g/n 3.73 dBi802.11a/n 4.85 dBiTransmit Power 802.11b +13  to +14 dBm typical802.11g +13 dBm typical802.11a +12 dBm typical802.11n (2.4 GHz) +12 dBm typical802.11n (5 GHz) +12 dBm typicalFrequency Range 802.11b/g/n 2400-2484 MHz802.11a/n 5150-5350 MHz, 5480-5720 MHz and 5725-5845 MHzPreliminary Draft
Chapter 7: SpecificationsMurata Bluetooth Radio260 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual7.2.2 Murata Bluetooth RadioRX Sensitivity 802.11b -78 dBm @ 11 Mbps802.11g -67 dBm @ 54 Mbps802.11a -67 dBm @ 54 Mbps802.11n (2.4 GHz) -66 dBm @ 65 Mbps802.11n (5 GHz -66 dBm @ 65 MbpsData Rates 802.11b 1,2,5.5,11 Mbps802.11a/g 6,9,12,18,24,36,48,54 Mbps802.11n 6.5,13,19.5,26,39,52,58.5,65 MbpsEVM 802.11b 32% max802.11g -26 dB max802.11a -26 dB max802.11n (2.4 GHz) -29 dB max802.11n (5 GHz -29 dB maxBluetooth Coexist-enceTI Wilink6 proprietary WiFi-BT co-existent scheme.Parameter Sub-parameters SpecificationsParameter SpecificationsForm Factor Embedded surface mount module, 11.4 x 9.4 mm* This is a combo module containing both Wi-Fi 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth V2.1+EDR radioAntenna Port U.FL jack (shared with Wi-Fi 802.11b/g/n radio)Antenna Type PIFA antenna. Covers 2400-2484 MHz@ <2.0:1 VSWRAntenna Gain 3.73 dBiTransmit Power 6.5 dBm typicalFrequency Range 2.400-2.4835 GHzPreliminary Draft
Chapter 7: SpecificationsSierra Wireless MC5728VEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2617.2.3 Sierra Wireless MC5728VChannel 79RX Sensitivity -90 dBm typical, -70 dBm maxData Rates -90 dBm typical, -70 dBm max802.11 Coexistence TI Wilink6 proprietary WiFi-BT co-existent scheme.Parameter SpecificationsFeatures SpecificationsPhysical  • Small PCI-Express Mini Card standards-based form factor. Adheres to Rev 1.2 of the PCI Express Mini Card Specification• Two U.FL RF connector jacksElectrical The MC5728V Mini Card is self-shielded; no additional shielding is required.Environmental Temperature operating range:• IS-98D compliance: -30 to +60° C• Reduced RF performance: +60 to +75° CRF • Dual-band support for both the 800 MHz cellular and 1.9 GHz PCS bands• Receive diversity support for the 800 MHz cellular and 1.9 GHz PCS bands• Adheres to CDMA authentication as specified in CDMA 1X• Support for IS-95A/B and CDMA 1X Release 0/A• Support for IS-856 1xEV-DO Revision ASupport for gpsOne™ and stand-alone GPSApplication Interface • USB supporting multiple logical channels over the USB MUX protocol• USB selective suspend supported for maximum power savings• Wakeup Enable-the modem can be set to wake the host device upon ring, restoration of radio coverage, and/or receipt of SMS• AT command interfacePreliminary Draft
Chapter 7: SpecificationsSierra Wireless MC5728V262 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualVoice The MC5728V Mini Card has internal IS-127 and IS-733 vocoders and supports:• Call origination• Silent retry call origination protocol• Echo cancellation•E911• Incoming call notificationPacket Mode • IS-2000 data rates up to 1531 kbps, simultaneous forward and reverse channel• IS-856 (1xEV-DO Rev. A) data rates up to 3.1 Mbps forward channel and 1.8 Mbps reverse channelIS-95 circuit-switched  • V.34 data rates to 14.4 kbps• Quick Net Connect (QNC) supportShort Message Service (SMS)• Send and receive• Notification of new messagesFeatures SpecificationsPreliminary Draft
Chapter 7: SpecificationsCinterion PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE RadioEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2637.2.4 Cinterion PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE RadioFeature SpecificationsGeneralFrequency bands GSM/GPRS/EDGE: Quad band, 850/900/1800/1900MHzUMTS/HSPA+: Five band, 800/850/AWS/1900/2100MHzGSM class Small MSOutput power (according to Release 99)Class 4 (+33dBm ±2dB) for EGSM850Class 4 (+33dBm ±2dB) for EGSM900Class 1 (+30dBm ±2dB) for GSM1800Class 1 (+30dBm ±2dB) for GSM1900Class E2 (+27dBm ± 3dB) for GSM 850 8-PSKClass E2 (+27dBm ± 3dB) for GSM 900 8-PSKClass E2 (+26dBm +3 /-4dB) for GSM 1800 8-PSKClass E2 (+26dBm +3 /-4dB) for GSM 1900 8-PSKClass 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 2100, WCDMA FDD Bd IClass 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 1900,WCDMA FDD Bd IIClass 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS AWS, WCDMA FDD Bd IVClass 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 850, WCDMA FDD Bd VClass 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 800, WCDMA FDD Bd VIOperating Temperature (board temperature)Normal operation: -30°C to +85°CRestricted operation: -40°C to +95°CPhysical Dimensions: 33.9mm x 50mm x 3.1mmWeight: approx. 9.5gRoHS All hardware components fully compliant with EU RoHS DirectiveHSPA features3GPP Release 6, 7 DL 14.4Mbps, UL 5.7MbpsUE CAT. [1-6], 11, 12 supportedCompressed mode (CM) supported according to 3GPP TS25.212UMTS features3GPP Release 4 PS data rate - 384 kbps DL / 384 kbps ULCS data rate - 64 kbps DL / 64 kbps ULGSM/GPRS/EGPRS featuresPreliminary Draft
Chapter 7: SpecificationsCinterion PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio264 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualData transfer GPRS:• Multislot Class 12• Full PBCCH support• Mobile Station Class B• Coding Scheme 1 - 4EGPRS:• Multislot Class 12• EDGE E2 power class for 8 PSK• Downlink coding schemes - CS 1-4, MCS 1-9• Uplink coding schemes - CS 1-4, MCS 1-9• SRB loopback and test mode B• 8-bit, 11-bit RACH• PBCCH support• 1 phase/2 phase access procedures• Link adaptation and IR• NACC, extended UL TBF• Mobile Station Class BCSD:• V.110, RLP, non-transparent• 14.4kbps• USSDSMS Point-to-point MT and MOCell broadcastGPS featuresProtocol NMEAModes Standalone GPS, Assisted GPS (control plane AGPS, E911 / user plane AGPS, gpsOneXTRA™)General Power saving modesGPS tracking in parallel to 2G/3G diversity operationSoftwareAT commands Hayes, 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005, and proprietary Cinterion Wireless Modules commandsSIM application toolkit SAT Release 99Feature SpecificationsPreliminary Draft
Chapter 7: SpecificationsLithium-Ion 3600 mAh Battery SpecificationsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2657.3 Lithium-Ion 3600 mAh Battery SpecificationsAudio Audio speech codecsGSM: AMR, EFR, FR, HR3GPP: AMRSpeakerphone operation, echo cancellation, noise suppressionFirmware update Generic update from host application over ASC0 or USBInterfacesModule interface 80-pin board-to-board connectorAntenna 50Ohms. Main GSM/UMTS antenna, UMTS diversity antenna, GPS antenna (active/passive)USB USB 2.0 High Speed (480Mbit/s) device interfaceSerial interface ASC0:• 8-wire modem interface with status and control lines, unbalanced,asynchronous• Adjustable baud rates from 9,600bps up to 921,600bps• Supports RTS0/CTS0 hardware flow control• Multiplex ability according to GSM 07.10 Multiplexer ProtocolUICC interface Supported chip cards: UICC/SIM/USIM 3V, 1.8VSpecial featuresPhonebook SIM and phoneAntenna SAIC (Single Antenna Interference Cancellation) / DARP (Down-link Advanced Receiver Performance)RX diversity type 3iFeature SpecificationsDescription SpecificationModel Number RV3010Part Number TBD (North America)TBD (World)Chemistry Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion)Preliminary Draft
Chapter 7: SpecificationsLithium-Ion 3600 mAh Battery Specifications266 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualBattery Voltage 2.7 V ~ 4.2 V (minimum ~ maximum)3.7 V (nominal)Capacity 3600 mAh/13.32Whr (typical)3450 mAh/12.76 Whr (minimum)Charge Current 1.72 A (typical)Charge Voltage 4.2V +/- 0.05Charge Method constant-current/constant-voltage (CC/CV)Discharge Current 1.72 A (typical)2.8 A (maximum)Internal Resistance 125 m  (typical)Storage Temperature -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)Charge temperature 0°C to +45°C (32°F to +113°F) (typical)Discharge Temperature -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F) (typical)Charge Taper Current 48 ~ 120 mACharge Time 3 hrs. (typical)Pre-condition Charge Current3 00 ~ 360 mAPre-condition Charge Termination Voltage3 VCycle Life 300 charge/discharge cycles with no degradation below 80% of nominal capacity based on 0.5 C charge / 0.5 C discharge rates (to 3.0 V) @ 23° C.Description SpecificationPreliminary Draft
Chapter 7: SpecificationsInternal ImagerEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual 2677.4 Internal ImagerThis section lists specifications for the EA11 Decoded 2D imager.7.4.1 EA11 Decoded 2D ImagerParameter SpecificationScan Rate 2D mode: 56 images/s auto adaptiveLinear Emulation Mode 200 scans/s auto adaptiveScan Angle 38.9° (horizontal), 25.4° (vertical)Optical Resolution 752 (H) x 480 (V) pixels, 256 gray levelsPrint Contrast down to 25%Versions Standard range and high densitySymbologies - 1DSymbologies - 2DEAN/UPC, GS1 Databar (limited expanded & omni-directional), RSS, Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved/Matrix/ Industrial and Standard 2 of 5, Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen, postal codes (Australian Post, BPO, Canada Post, Dutch Post, Japan Post, PostNet, Sweden Post)Data Matrix, PDF417, Micro PDF 417, Codablock Maxicode, QR, Aztec GS1 composite codesVoltage (optics) 3.3V -5% / +10% (typical values)Operating Current 170mA - 310mA (lighting condition dependent)Power Saving Mode 2mAAmbient Light Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to 100,000 luxRegulatory Approvals UL, VDE certified, RoHS compliantPreliminary Draft
7.4.1.1 EA11 Typical Reading DistancesPreliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual A-1APPENDIX AWIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK (WWAN) A.1 Wireless WANPsion Teklogix offers the MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio – an EP10 hand-held equipped with a GSM/GPRS radio has wide area networking capabilities. With this radio and a SIM card, you can wirelessly transfer data, and you use the EP10 voice option to place phone calls.A.1.1 Taskbar IconsWireless WAN icons in the taskbar indicate the status of your wide area network connection. Note that these icons are only visible when a GSM/GPRS radio is in-stalled in the computer, and the interface is enabled.Once the modem detects that a packet data service is available, a letter is added to the signal strength icon indicating the kind of packet data service. Keep in mind that the signal strength icon is displayed without a letter if packet data service is not available, or if it is available but not yet initialized. • G  - GSM/GPRS• E - GSM/EDGE•U - UMTS• H - UMTS/HSDPA• X - CDMA/1xRTT•  i   - iDEN•W - WiDENUser interaction is required (e.g. the user is required to enter a PIN).A non-recoverable (fatal) error has occurred.The modem status is unknown or the modem is not connected to any network (the signal strength is 0%).The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 1% and 20%.Preliminary Draft
A-2 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)Establishing a ConnectionThe modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 21% and 40%.The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 41% and 60%.The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 61% and 80%.The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 81% and 100%.A GPRS packet data connection is active, the signal strength is between 41% and 60% and GSM/GPRS packet service is available.The signal strength icon is replaced by a connection indicator icon when a packet data con-nection is started.A GPRS packet data connection is active.In addition to the signal strength or connection indicator a second icon may be shown.A new SMS (Short Message Service) message has arrived.The dialer icon is displayed when the Voice option is available (SIM card and GPRS radio are installed). When you have an active call, this icon flashes yellow and then green.A.1.2 Establishing a ConnectionTo display the main Wireless WAN dialog box:• Double-tap on the Wireless WAN icon in the taskbar.If the icon is not visible in the taskbar, the radio interface has been shut down or the modem has been removed:•In the Control Panel, choose the Wireless WAN icon.The main Wireless WAN dialog box is displayed.Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)Establishing a ConnectionEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual A-3Figure A.1  Establishing a ConnectionWhen “Ready to connect” is displayed in the Status field, the Connect Data button is enabled.• Tap on the Connect Data button.The progress of the connection is tracked in the Status field.• PPP link to modem active.• Authenticating user.• User authenticated.• Connected.When the connection state reaches PPP link to modem active, the taskbar icon changes to in-dicate an active connection. The Connect Data button changes to Disconnect.A.1.2.1 Disconnecting From a NetworkTo disconnect from the network:• Tap the stylus on the Disconnect button, and then on OK.Note: If you are prompted to enter a PIN, refer to“Entering a PIN Number” on page A-4 for details.Note: Keep in mind that these states may be displayed fairly quickly if the progress of the connection is rapid. Preliminary Draft
A-4 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)Advanced InformationWhen the computer’s network connection is severed, the Status field displays “Ready to connect”.The signal strength is displayed in the main Wireless WAN screen, even while a connection is active. The Rx bytes and Tx bytes fields estimate the amount of data transmitted and received, respectively.A.1.2.2 Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User InterfaceWhile it is not usual to shut down the GSM/GPRS user interface, you can accomplish this by tapping on the File menu and choosing the Exit command at the bottom of the main Wireless WAN dialog box.A.1.3 Advanced InformationIn most cases, when a GSM/GPRS radio and SIM are installed in your computer, setup is automatic. Follow the steps outlined under the heading “Establishing a Connection” on page A-2 to make a connection. The information in this section is for advanced setup purposes.A.1.3.1 Entering a PIN NumberIf a PIN is required, a PIN entry dialog box is displayed.• Type your PIN, and press [ENTER].Once the correct PIN or PUK is entered or if none was required, the modem is instructed to perform a GSM network registration followed by a GPRS attach. The main Wireless WAN dialog box reflects the progress of the initialization.• Searching for modem.• Initializing modem.• SIM is ready.• Searching for network.• Registered on network.• Searching for GPRS.Note: Once you’ve shut down the user interface, you can only enable the radio by opening the Control Panel and tapping on the Wireless WAN icon to display the Wireless WAN dialog box.Note: If you exceed the number of allowable attempts, a PUK entry window is brought to the foreground. You’ll need to enter a new PIN number.Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)Advanced InformationEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual A-5• Ready to connect.If the modem loses the connection to the GSM network, the following states are repeated: Searching for network, Registered on network, Searching for packet data, and Ready to connect. A.1.3.2 Error StatesThe following temporary error states (i.e., these states may disappear without interaction) may be displayed:• Emergency calls only. The modem has found a network but is not allowed to register (e.g. no roaming agree-ment between networks). The modem keeps searching for another network.• No network found. A network is not currently available. The modem continues searching for a network.• Packet data not available. The current network does not support a packet data service.• Packet data not allowed. The modem is not allowed to use the packet data service on the current network (e.g. no GPRS roaming agreement between network; a roaming agreement for voice may still be in place). It is also possible that you do not have a subscription for GPRS at all.The remaining error states are permanent:• SIM is missing. The SIM card is missing. After the SIM has been inserted a warm boot may be required.• SIM failure. The SIM card is permanently disabled (e.g. because the wrong PUK has been entered too many times). A new SIM is needed.• Modem failure. The modem did not respond to commands as expected. If a warm boot does not clear this condition, the modem may need to be replaced.• NDIS error. An internal software error has occurred. If a warm boot does not clear this condition, Psion Teklogix technical support may need to investigate further.Preliminary Draft
A-6 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)Too ls  MenuA.1.4 Tools MenuThe Tools menu in the main Wireless WAN dialog box offers some additional, advanced setup features. A.1.4.1 Data ConfigurationEnable Automatic ConnectIf the Enable automatic connect checkbox is checked (unchecked by default), the Wireless WAN user interface will attempt to establish a GPRS connection whenever GPRS is avail-able (e.g. after resume from suspend without further user interaction). Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)Tools MenuEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual A-7To activate the automatic connection mode:• Tap on the OK button.While automatic connection mode is enabled, the Connect Data button in the main Wireless LAN dialog box changes to Disable Auto. To close the currently active connection (if any) and disable the automatic connection mode:• Tap on Disable Auto.Use Virtual Serial PortIf Use virtual serial port is enabled, packet data connections are established through the virtual serial port of the WWAN driver rather than through the WWAN driver directly. This checkbox should only be checked if certain third-party VPN (Virtual Private Network) clients are used that do not work correctly otherwise. The default setting is disabled (unchecked). Enable Automatic ConfigurationIn most cases, the data connection is configured automatically and no user interaction is re-quired. This is true even if multiple SIM cards from different operators are used with the same device. The connection parameters are adjusted automatically when a new SIM card is detected (this may require a warm boot). The connection parameters are retrieved from a database. Manual configuration should be necessary only if:• One or more parameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is not yet in the database. (The database should be corrected for subsequent software releases.)• An operator has assigned individual GPRS user names and passwords. • A very large site has their own APN. Such connections always have to be configured manually.Important: Automatic connection mode should not be used if applications other than the Wireless WAN user interface (e.g. Connection Manager) are expected to open and close connections. If the automatic connection mode is enabled and another application closes the GPRS connection, the WWAN user interface will immediately try to re-establish the connection.Note: The connection setup takes longer through the virtual serial port. Preliminary Draft
A-8 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)Too ls  Menu• A customer has subscribed for a static IP address. By definition this must be configured manually.ProfilesIn the following section, all the parameters that need to be configured for a connection (such as APN, user name, password, DNS server addresses etc.) are referred to as a ‘profile’. Every profile is identified by an arbitrary, unique name. The profile named Default is special in that it is always present and can neither be edited nor deleted. The Default profile uses pa-rameters from a built-in database. The home network (the network that issued the SIM) is used for the database look-up. While there can be many configured profiles, only one profile can be active at any time.If connection profiles are configured manually, the Enable automatic configuration check-box should normally be unchecked.In one particular use case, manually configured profiles may be combined with automatic configuration. If multiple SIM cards are used with the same device, each SIM card being from a different operator and some or all of them requiring a manually set up profile, auto-matic configuration may be used to automatically pick the correct manually configured profile for each SIM card. For this to work, each profile must be configured while the corre-sponding SIM card is inserted in the device and initialized (i.e. the status is at least SIM is ready).The Select profile: drop-down list in the data configuration profile selects to which profile a subsequent action applies. A profile named Default is always present and contains the current parameters from the database. The following actions are available:ShowThe parameters for the selected profile are displayed when you tap the stylus on this button. For the Default profile, the publicly known password is shown – otherwise, the password is hidden.EditThe parameters of the selected profile can be edited when you choose the Edit button. Keep in mind that you cannot edit the Default profile.DeleteThe selected profile is deleted. You cannot delete the Default profile.ActivateWhen this button is chosen, the selected profile becomes the active profile. Activation is possible only if the Enable automatic configuration: checkbox is unchecked.Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)Tools MenuEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual A-9NewTapping on the New button allows you to create a new profile. Figure A.2  Creating a New ProfileThe name of the newly created profile must be different from all existing profiles. Also, the name cannot be Default. When the New Data Profile dialog box is opened, a proposal for a unique name is filled in the corresponding entry field. If a manually configured profile has a secret password and unauthorized access to the device is a concern even after the SIM PIN has been entered, the password should not be entered in the New Data Profile dialog box and the Prompt user for password checkbox should be checked instead. In this case, you will be prompted for the password each time a connection is initiated (the Connect Data button in the main Wireless WAN dialog box is selected). If Force PAP authentication (Password Authentication Protocol) is enabled, a simple authentication protocol is used to authenticate a user to a remote access server or Internet Service Provider.ResetThe Reset button in the New Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes resets all entry fields to the values they had when the dialog box was opened. Preliminary Draft
A-10 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)Too ls  MenuAdvanced IPFigure A.3  Assigning IP InformationThe Advanced IP button in the Show Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes opens another dialog box that allows you to configure a static IP address as well providing DNS and WINS fields so that you can specify DNS and WINS resolvers.A.1.4.2 Security ConfigurationThe Security Configuration dialog box is accessed through the Tools menu. The Security Configuration dialog box allows you to enable, disable and change the PIN. You will need the current PIN to make any of these changes. The PIN must be enabled in order to be changed. (If the PIN is disabled, the New PIN entry field is greyed out.)The Require PIN on resume checkbox is independent of the aforementioned settings. By de-fault, this checkbox is unchecked. While this option remains unchecked, any PIN entered on startup or through the Security Configuration dialog box and submitted successfully to the modem is stored in memory for as long as the device is not rebooted. This stored PIN is then Note: Keep in mind that some network operators do not allow the SIM PIN to be disabled. A new PIN must consist of 4 to 8 numeric digits.Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)Tools MenuEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual A-11used without further user interaction whenever the modem requires a PIN (such as resume after suspend or modem removal). The stored PIN is also automatically entered in the Current PIN text box whenever the Security Configuration dialog box is called up. If unauthorized access to the device is a concern, the Require PIN on resume checkbox should be checked. In this case, the PIN is not stored; whenever a PIN is required, you will be prompted to enter an appropriate value.A.1.4.3 Network ConfigurationIn the main Wireless WAN window:• Tap on the Tools menu, and choose Network.By default the GSM radio modem automatically chooses from the available and allowed networks (allowed networks are the home network and all other networks with which the home network has a roaming agreement). You may find there are some situations in which you want to override this default behaviour. For example, you may want to disable roaming if you find yourself in a border area where the home network is not available but a foreign roaming partner is available. Abroad, you may find that an available network does not have GPRS roaming agreements. In this case, you’ll need to manually select the network which you know to support GPRS roaming.Automatic network selection is enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking Enable auto-matic network select in the Network dialog box. When automatic network selection is disabled, you must select a network manually.Available networks can also be viewed without changing any settings. Scanning for avail-able networks is a lengthy operation – a progress bar is shown while the scan is active. For every network that is found, the network name, country, status and numeric network identi-fier (MCC/MNC, Mobile Country Code followed by the Mobile Network Code) is displayed.Preliminary Draft
A-12 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)Too ls  MenuA.1.4.4 Driver Mode ConfigurationBy default, the Wireless WAN driver is enabled (the Enable driver checkbox is checked). The driver must be disabled in order to use the modem for anything other than GPRS (e.g. dial-up data, fax, or in order to manually submit AT commands to the modem for develop-ment, testing, approvals, etc.). If the Enable driver checkbox is not checked, the driver is shut down as soon as the OK button in the Driver Mode dialog box is chosen. If, on the other hand, the Wireless WAN driver is not running and the Enable driver check-box is checked, the Wireless WAN driver is started as soon the Driver Mode dialog box is closed using the OK button. Since all currently supported GSM modems are automatically detected, the Enable auto-matic port detection checkbox should always be checked. If this checkbox is not checked, a serial port can be selected manually. This experimental feature allows the driver to be used with an internal GSM modem that was not recognized by the automatic detection or an ex-ternal GSM modem connected to a serial port of the computer through USB or through Note: Your home network operator will need to let you know which other networks have roaming agreements. Even when a network is listed with an ‘Available’ status, it does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that the roaming agreement covers GPRS. A status of ‘Forbidden’ indicates that the network cannot be used. If you choose a network that is not covered by a roaming agreement, the status in the main WWAN dialog box changes to ‘Emergency calls only’, ‘No network found’, ‘GPRS not available’ or ‘GPRS not allowed’.Note: When the driver is not running, no network status or signal strength can be displayed.Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)Tools MenuEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual A-13Bluetooth. An external modem connected to a serial port must support 115.2kbit/s, 8bit, no parity and hardware flow control.A.1.4.5 Modem InformationThe fields in this dialog box cannot be edited, they only display information about the com-puter’s modem. If the network operator has not programmed a user’s phone number into his SIM, the Phone: field remains empty. If the main menu shows an error status, at least partial modem information may be available.A.1.4.6 User InterfacePreliminary Draft
A-14 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)Too ls  MenuTas k barChoosing Taskbar displays a dialog box in which you can determine which Wireless WAN icons will be displayed in the taskbar.SoundsTapping on the Sounds option displays a dialog box in which you can customize which sounds your EP10 will emit and when these sounds will be played.Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)SMS MenuEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual A-15A.1.5 SMS MenuSMS (Short Message Service) functions are accessed through the SMS menu. For modems that support a SIM card, the SIM initialization typically takes longer than the network ini-tialization, resulting in a noticeable delay before the SMS functions become available. A.1.5.1 NewTapping on the New button opens a dialog for sending a new SMS message. The recipient's phone number (to be entered in the To: field) can consist of the digits 0 through 9, as well as the * and # characters, optionally preceded by one + character, indicating an international number (i.e. the country code follows immediately after the + character). By checking the Store message in Outbox field a new message can be stored in the Outbox before being sent. If no storage space is available, or the modem does not support the storage of outgoing messages, then this checkbox is disabled.A.1.5.2 InboxTapping on the Inbox button opens the list of received messages. Reading 50 messages, for example, from the SIM can take about 30 seconds. By default the list of messages is sorted with the most recently received message first. The list can be sorted by any other column by clicking on the corresponding column heading. Clicking the same column heading twice re-verses the sort order. Pressing any letter or digit moves the highlight to the next message whose address begins with that letter or number. Preliminary Draft
A-16 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)VoiceThe Open button opens the selected message in a new window such that the entire message can be read including the original formatting (line breaks are replaced by spaces in the Inbox message list). Pressing the Reply button opens the new message dialog as described above, except the destination phone number is filled in already.A.1.5.3 OutboxTapping on the Outbox button opens the list of sent messages. Otherwise the Outbox behaves exactly as the Inbox described above. The date and time when a message was sent is not available for GSM modems.A.1.5.4 SMS ConfigurationTapping on the SMS Configuration button opens the SMS configuration dialog. The SMS Centre address follows the same rules as the recipient's phone number in the New message dialog. The message validity period parameter is sent to the SMS Centre with each message sent subsequently and instructs the SMS Centre on how long it should attempt to deliver the message to the recipient (the SMS Centre may impose an upper limit on the validity period regardless of the setting). The user interface tries to keep the SMS storage location available for a new incoming message if the Delete oldest message when full checkbox is checked. In this case, when a new message arrives and the SMS storage becomes full, the oldest received message is de-leted. If any string is entered as the Message Suppression Prefix, then messages beginning with that string will not be shown in either the Inbox or Outbox. In this way messages in-tended for another application running on the same device can be hidden from the user, as long as those messages begin with the string configured here.A.1.6 VoiceThe Voi c e tab is described in detail under “Voice – Using the Phone Dialer” on page 31.Note: The date and time formats can be changed through the Region and Language menu in Control Panel. For a new date or time format to take effect the Inbox has to be closed and re-opened.Note: Only certain discrete validity period values can be sent and thus the validity period is rounded to the nearest allowed value. The next time the SMS configuration dialog is opened the rounded value is shown. Preliminary Draft
Appendix A: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)Power ModeEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual A-17A.2 Power ModeThe power mode of the modem is controlled through the Power menu in the Control Panel (not through the Wireless WAN user interface). For CF Card modems, the settings are found under the Devices tab. If the checkbox for a modem is unchecked, no power is applied to the modem and no driver is loaded (neither the serial port driver nor the Wireless WAN driver). If the checkbox is checked, power is applied to the modem and the drivers are loaded when the computer is turned on. Power is removed from the modem when the computer enters suspend mode.Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual B-1APPENDIX BPORT PINOUTS B.1  Dock Port PinoutPin # Pin Name Signal Direction Rela-tive To DPA Comment1 GND DGND -2 VDD_EXT_PWR3 VDD_EXT_PWR VDD_EXT_PWR Input These 3 pins are connected together.4 VDD_EXT_PWR5 BATT_OUT VDD_BATT_OUT Output6 AUDIO_P Output Audio positive.7 AUDIO_N Output Audio negative.8 VDD_USBOTG Bi-directional USB Power (+5.5V). As output, sup-plies external devices when EP10 is in USB Host mode. As input, charges battery when EP10 is in USB Client mode.9 DOCK_ID Input Dock ID.10 USB_OTG_DN Bi-directional11 USB_OTG_DP Bi-directionalPreliminary Draft
B-2 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix B: Port PinoutsBattery Contact PinoutB.2 Battery Contact Pinout12 USB_OTG_ID Input13 GND DGND -14 TXDATA Output RS-232 data transmit. Max bit rate 115 kbits/sec.15 RXDATA Input RS-232 data receive. Max bit rate 115 kbits/sec.16 GND DGND -Pin # Pin Name Signal Direction Rela-tive To DPA CommentPIN # Signal Name Function1 Pack + Battery positive2 Pack + Battery positive3 DQ Serial data I/O4 Det Connect to Pack – through 0 5 - No Connection6 Pack -  Battery negative7 Pack - Battery negativePreliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-1APPENDIX C BAR CODES SETTINGSC.1 Scanner MenuThe drop down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose from the imager for your unit.The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes it supports. Keep in mind that some bar code types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed. All internal scanners can be configured using the Barcode dialog boxes. Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable only those codes that are required by the application.Preliminary Draft
C-2 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsDecoded (Internal) ScannerC.2 Decoded (Internal) ScannerC.2.1 Options – Decoded (Internal) ScannerDot Time (msec)The value selected for “Dot Time (msec)” determines (in milliseconds) how long the target-ing dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of 0 msec, 200 msec or 400 msec. A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot.Aim DurationThis parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser begins sweeping. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 30 (0 to 3 sec.). A value of 0 (zero) disables the aiming dot.Laser On TimeThe value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed.Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 5 and 99, each number representing 0.1.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsAdvanced Options – Decoded (Internal)EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-3C.2.2 Advanced Options – Decoded (Internal)Continuous Scan ModeSetting this parameter to ‘on’ keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down.Minimum Cancel TimeThe value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly triggers on/off.Power ModeThis parameter is a power-saving option. Tapping on it displays a screen listing two power mode options: Continuous Power and Low Power.In Continuous Power mode, the scanner is always on, waiting for a trigger pull or a serial communication.In Low Power mode, the scanner is in a standby state, drawing minimal power until a trigger pull or serial communication wakes it. Keep in mind that while this option is more suitable for battery powered applications, there will be a slight delay while the scanner powers up to scan a bar code.Low Power TimeoutTo extend laser life, you can select the length of time the scanner remains active following a successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned – a successful decode restores normal blinking.When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min or 3 min.Parameter ScanningSetting this parameter to on enables decoding of parameter bar codes.Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and the EP10 is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low Power Timeout’ is not used.Preliminary Draft
C-4 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsAdvanced Options – Decoded (Internal)Linear Security LevelThis parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your bar code quality. There are four levels of decode security for linear code types (e.g., Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5). Higher security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of bar code quality. As se-curity levels increase, the scanner’s decode speed decreases.Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from 1 to 4. “Linear security level 1” specifies that the following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:“Linear security level 2” specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice before being decoded.“Linear security level 3” specifies that code types other than the following must be success-fully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three times:“Linear security level 4” requires that all code types be successfully read three times before being decoded.Bi-Direction RedundancyCode Type LengthCodabar AllMSI Plessey 4 or lessD 5 of 5 8 or lessI 2 of 5 8 or lessCode Type LengthMSI Plessey 4 or lessD 2 of 5 8 or lessI 2 of 5 8 or lessNote: This parameter is only valid if a “Linear Security Level” is enabled.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsDecoded (Internal) 2D Scanning OptionsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-5When this parameter is enabled, a bar code must be successfully scanned in both directions (forward and reverse) before being decoded.Scan AngleThis option allows you to choose from two scan angles: Normal Angle or Alternate Angle. Choosing Normal Angle allows the normal operation for scanning long range and short range. Choosing Alternate Angle widens the beam to allow scanning of long bar codes at short range but at the cost of long range scanning.C.2.3 Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning OptionsScanning ModeWhen you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose one of the following scanning modes: Smart Raster, Always Raster, Programmable Raster, Slab Pattern, Cyclone Pattern or Semi-Omni Pattern.Raster Height And Raster Expand RateThese parameter determine the laser pattern’s height and rate of expansion.Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from 1 to 15. C.2.4 Data Options — Decoded (Internal) ScannerTransmit Code ID CharA code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a transmit code: None, AIM or Symbol.Note: These parameters are only used when either Programmable Raster or Always Raster is assigned to the “2D Scanning Mode” parameter. “2D Raster Height” and “2D Raster Expand Rate” are intended for very specific applications and are usually not required for normal scanning purposes.Preliminary Draft
C-6 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCode 39Scan Data FormatThis parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format. Double-tapping on “Scan Data Format” displays the following options from which you can choose a data format: data (as-is), data [S1], data [S2], data [S1][S2], [P] data, [P] data [S1], [P] data [S2] and [P] data [S1][S2].Prefix [P], Suffix [S1] And Suffix [S2]A prefix and/or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data editing.When you double-tap on these parameters, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 255.Delete Char Set ECIsSetting this parameter to on enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences representing Character Set ECIs – Extended Channel Interpretations (also known as GLIs) from its buffer before transmission. When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and MicroPDF417 bar codes containing Character Set ECIs, even when the ECI Protocol is disabled.ECI DecoderSetting this parameter to on enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel Interpre-tations (ECIs) supported by the scanner. This parameter has no effect on symbols that were not encoded using ECIs. If this parameter is set to off and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is scanned, the scanner transmits the ECI escape followed by the uninterpreted data.C.2.5 Code 39EnabledSetting this parameter to on enables “Code 39”.Enable Trioptic Code 39Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. Setting this parameter to on allows this type of symbology to be recognized.Note: “Trioptic Code 39” and “Full ASCII” should not be enabled simultaneously. The scanner does not automatically discriminate between these two symbologies.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCode 39EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-7Convert To Code 32Setting this parameter to on allows the scanner to convert the bar code from “Code 39” to “Code 32”.Code 32 PrefixWhen this parameter is enabled, the prefix character “A” is added to all “Code 32” bar codes. Set Length L1 And Set Length L2Lengths for “Code 39” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be decoded by your scanner.Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 1 to 55.Note: “Code 39” must be enabled in order for this parameter to function.Note: “Convert to Code 32” must be enabled in order for this parameter to function.Preliminary Draft
C-8 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCode 39Check Digit VerificationWhen this parameter is enabled (set to on), the integrity of a “Code 39” symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.Transmit Check DigitIf the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must to enabled.Full ASCIIIf this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character.Decode PerformanceIf this parameter is enabled, one of three decode levels can be chosen in the “Decode Perfor-mance Level” parameter.Decode Perf. LevelThis parameter provides three levels of decode performance or “aggressiveness” for Code 39 symbols. Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code ori-entation – this is useful when scanning very long and/or truncated bar codes. Keep in mind that increased levels reduce decode security.When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a decode performance level of between 1 and 3.Length RestrictionThe parameters in this sub-menu allow you to define the length of the bar codes that will be decoded using either the Field Size parameter or the Minimum Size and Maximum Size pa-rameters (see below). The order of operation to either match the Field Size or determine if the length falls between the Minimum Size and Maximum Size is as follows:• Strip the leading and trailing characters.• Add the prefix and suffix characters.• Count the number of characters remaining to either match the field size or determine if the length falls between the minimum and maximum size.Note: Only those “Code 39” symbols that include a Mod 43 check digit are decoded when this parameter is enabled.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCode 128EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-9Field SizeWhen a value is assigned for this parameter, only bar codes that match the field size exactly can be transmitted. If a value is assigned to this parameter, a Minimum Size and Maximum Size value is not required.Minimum Size And Maximum SizeWhen a value is assigned to these parameters, only bar code lengths that fall between the minimum and maximum value can be decoded. If values are assigned to these parameters, a Field Size value is not required.Add/Remove DataPrefix CharThis character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.Suffix CharThis character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.Strip LeadingThis parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the begin-ning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.Strip TrailingThe value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.C.2.6 Code 128EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Code 128”.Enable GS1-128/GS1 USPreviously UPC/EAN and UCC, these types of bar codes include group separators and start codes.Note: For Code 39 bar codes, the “AIAG Strip” is performed before the “Strip Leading”.Preliminary Draft
C-10 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsEAN 13Enable ISBT 128To successfully scan this variation, “Enable ISBT 128” must be set to on.Decode PerformanceIf this parameter is set to on, one of three decode levels assigned to the “Decode Perfor-mance Level” parameter can be selected.Decode Perf. LevelThis parameter provides three levels of decode performance or “aggressiveness” for Code 128 symbols. Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code ori-entation – this is useful when scanning very long and/or truncated bar codes. Keep in mind that increased levels reduce decode security.When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a decode performance level of between 1 and 3.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.2.7 EAN 13EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.2.8 EAN 8EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.EAN-8 Zero ExtendWhen this parameter is enabled, five leading zeros are added to decoded EAN-8 symbols, making them compatible in format to EAN-13 symbols. Disabling this parameter returns EAN-8 symbols to their normal format.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsUPC AEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-11Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.2.9 UPC AEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “UPC A”.UPC-A Check DigitIf you enable this parameter, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.UPC-A PreambleWhen you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed where you can choose one of three options for lead-in characters for UPC-A symbols transmitted to the host device: System Char – system character transmitted with the data, Country code and System Char – both the country code (“0” for USA) and system character are transmitted with the or None – no preamble is transmitted. The lead-in characters are considered part of the symbol.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.2.10  UPC EEnabled UPC-ESet this parameter to on to allow “UPC E” bar code scans.Enabled UPC-E1Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.UPC-E And UPC-E1 Check DigitIf you enable one or both of these parameters, a check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.UPC-E And UPC-E1 PreambleWhen you double-tap on one of these parameters, a dialog box is displayed where you can choose one of three options for lead-in characters for UPC-E and UPC-E1 symbols transmit-ted to the host device: System Char – system character transmitted with the data, Country code and System Char – both the country code (“0” for USA) and system character are Preliminary Draft
C-12 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsUPC/EAN Shared Settingstransmitted with the data or None – no preamble is transmitted. The lead-in characters are considered part of the symbol.Conv. UPC-E To UPC-AThis parameter converts UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A pro-gramming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-AThis parameter converts UPC-E1 (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A pro-gramming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.2.11  UPC/EAN Shared SettingsThe parameters you set here are a shared across all available UPC and EAN bar codes. Enable Bookland EANSetting this parameter to on allows your scanner to recognize “Bookland EAN” bar codes.Supplementals“Supplementals” are additionally appended characters (2 or 5).Double-tapping this parameter displays a list of options. If Ignore is chosen, UPC/EAN is decoded and the supplemental characters are ignored. If Decode is chosen, UPC/EAN symbols are decoded with supplementals. Autodiscriminate works in conjunction with the “Supp. Redundancy” parameter.Supp. RedundancyWith Autodiscriminate selected in the “Supplementals” parameter, “Supp. Redundancy” adjusts the number of times a symbol without supplementals is decoded before transmission. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value between 2 and 20. A value of 5 or above is recommended when Autodiscriminate is selected and you are decoding a mix of UPC/EAN symbols with and without supplementals.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCode 93EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-13Security LevelThis parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge UPC/EAN bar codes. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose a level from 0 to 3. Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code.Linear Decode“Linear Decode” applies to code types containing two adjacent blocks (e.g., UPC-A, EAN-8, EAN-13). When enabled (set to on), a bar code is transmitted only when both the left and right blocks are successfully decoded within one laser scan. This option should be enabled when bar codes are in proximity to each other.2D UPC Half Block StitchingSetting this parameter to on enables “UPC Half Block Stitching” for the SE 3223 omnidirec-tional engine only.C.2.12  Code 93EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Code 93” or off to disable it.Set Length L1 And Set Length L2Lengths for “Code 93” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 4 to 55.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.Preliminary Draft
C-14 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCodabarC.2.13  CodabarEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Codabar” or off to disable it.Set Length L1 And Set Length L2Lengths for “Codabar” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a spec-ified range from 5 to 55.CLSI EditingWhen enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters and inserts a space after the first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol. NOTIS EditingWhen enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters from decoded Codabar symbol.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.2.14  MSI PlesseyEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “MSI Plessey”.Note: Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsMSI PlesseyEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-15Set Length L1 And Set Length L2Lengths for “MSI Plessey” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 6 to 55.Check DigitsDouble-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose One or Two check digit(s). If this parameter is set to One, it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit. If “Check Digits” is set to Two, it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits.Transmit Check DigitIf this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the bar code data.Check Digit AlgorithmWhen the Two MSI Plessey check digits option is selected, an additional verification is re-quired to ensure integrity. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box n which you can choose the algorithm to be used: MOD 10/MOD 11 or MOD 10/MOD 10. Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.Note: If Two check digits is selected, an MSI Plessey “Check Digit Algorithm: must also be selected. See below for details.Preliminary Draft
C-16 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsInterleaved 2 of 5C.2.15  Interleaved 2 of 5EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.Set Length L1 And Set Length L2Lengths for “Interleaved 2 of 5” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One dis-crete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 4 to 14.Check Digit VerificationWhen enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of an I 2 of 5 symbol to ensure it complies with a specified algorithm – either USS (Uniform Symbology Specifica-tion) or OPCC (Optical Product Code Council).Transmit Check DigitIf this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the bar code data.Convert To EAN 13If this parameter is enabled, the I 2 of 5 bar code is converted to EAN 13.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.2.16  Discrete 2 of 5EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsRSS CodeEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-17Set Length L1 And Set Length L2Lengths for “Discrete 2 of 5” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 1 to 12.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.2.17  RSS CodeEnableSetting this parameter to on enables “2D RSS Code” scanning capability.Enable RSS-14 (Reduced Space Symbology)RSS-14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top of the other half. Stacking the code reduces the bar code length, and providing the nominal height of the code is maintained, it can be omni-directionally scanned.Enable RSS Limited“RSS-Limited” is restricted, in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs (global trade item number) that begin with either a 0 or a 1. It is not stackable and is not designed to be read omni-directionally.Enable RSS Expanded “RSS Expanded” uses the same application identifiers as UCC/EAN-128 codes but it can be split into sections and stacked several rows high, reducing the length of the symbol, while increasing the capacity of data that can be stored. “RSS Expanded” code can be omni-direc-tionally scanned.Preliminary Draft
C-18 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCompositeLength RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.2.18  CompositeA composite symbol includes multi-row 2D components making it compatible with linear and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners. The options available for this parameter represent multi-level components of a composite symbol.Enable CC-C And Enable CC-ABTo activate these components, set these parameters to on.Enable TLC-39This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code. Setting this pa-rameter to on enables this parameter.C.2.19  PDF-417EnableSetting this parameter to on enables PDF-417 two dimensional (2D) coding.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled. In addition, “Center Bar Code Only” must be disabled.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsMicro PDF-417EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-19C.2.20  Micro PDF-417EnableSetting this parameter to on enables “Micro PDF-417” bar code scanning. Micro PDF-417 is a multi-row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater area efficiency but lower data capacity than PDF-417.Code 128 EmulationWhen this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF-417 symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols. If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, the following Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes:]C1 - if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915]C2 - if the first codeword is 908 or 909]C0 - if the first codeword is 910 or 911If Code 128 Emulation is set to off, the Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes:]L3 - if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915]L4 - if the first codeword is 908 or 909]L5 - if the first codeword is 910 or 911Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.Preliminary Draft
C-20 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsDecodedC.3 Decoded• Tap on the Scanner drop down menu, and choose Decoded (Intermec ISCP).C.3.1 Options – Decoded ScannerLaser On TimeThe value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed.Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 1 and 10 seconds.C.3.2 Advanced Options – Decoded ScannerContinuous Scan ModeSetting this parameter to ‘on’ keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down.Minimum Cancel TimeThe value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly triggers on/off.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCode 39EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-21Low Power TimeoutTo extend laser life, you can select the length of time the scanner remains active following a successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned – a successful decode restores normal blinking.When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min or 3 min.Parameter ScanningSetting this parameter to Enabled allows decoding of parameter bar codes.Same Read ValidateThe data is only transmitted after repeated reads give the same result. The value assigned at this parameter determines the number of reads required, from 0 to 10 times. Same Read TimeoutPrevents the same bar code from being read more than once. The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec. Diff Read TimeoutPrevents unwanted reading of other bar codes on the same label. The value assigned deter-mines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec. Add AIM ID PrefixThe AIM ID (Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility) is an international bar code identifier. When this parameter is enabled, the AIM ID is inserted at the beginning of the decoded bar code.C.3.3 Code 39EnableSetting this parameter to on enables “Code 39”.Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and the EP10 is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low Power Timeout’ is not used.Preliminary Draft
C-22 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCode 39Full ASCIIIf this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character.Reading RangeDetermines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance. Start/Stop TransmitSetting this parameter to on enables the transmission of start and stop characters, which are usually not transmitted. Code 39 can start and end with either a * or a $ character (see also next parameter, “Accepted Start Char”).Accepted Start CharThis parameter allows the user the option of using one of the two start/stop characters or both ($ char, * char, $ and * char). Check Digit VerificationUses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted. The available options are: Disabled, MOD 43 Check, French CIP, or Italian CIP. Transmit Check DigitIf the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.Minimum LengthMinimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing 7 characters.Italian CIP (Italian pharmaceutical) is also known as Code 32. It is transmitted as a standard Code 39 if checksum is not validated.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCode 128EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-23Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.3.4 Code 128EnableSetting this parameter to on enables “Code 128”.GS1-128“GS1-128” is the GS1 implementation of the Code 128 barcode specification. The former correct name was UCC/EAN-128.GS1-128 Identifier“GS1-128 Identifier” allows the AIM ID " ]C1" for EAN 128 to be transmitted or removed. By default, this identifier is transmitted if EAN 128 is enabled.GTIN CompliantGTIN (global trade item number) processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14-character EAN/UCC GTIN. To use GTIN processing, you must activate the EAN 128 symbology.FNC1 Conversion“FNC1 Conversion” allows the embedded FNC1 character to be converted to another char-acter for applications that cannot use the default <GS> Group Separator or hex (1d). Double-tapping on this option displays a dialog box listing the allowable range – 0 to 255. Enable ISBT 128 To successfully scan this type of bar code (International Society of Blood Transfusion), this option must be set to on. If you enable this type of bar code, Code 128/EAN 128 is deacti-vated to avoid any confusion.ISBT Concat TransmitThe codes are not concatenated by default. You need to choose one of the options provided for this parameter to send concatenated code. Choosing Only Concatenated Codes transmits only concatenated codes – single codes will not be transmitted. Choosing Concatenated or Important: When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated, it is not possible to read normal EAN 128 Codes. Preliminary Draft
C-24 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsEAN 13Single transmits single codes or concatenated codes. If only one code of a pair is read, that code will be transmitted as a single code. If both codes in a pair are detected, they will be concatenated provided that ISBT Concat Any Pair (see below) is enabled.ISBT Concat Any PairEnabling this parameter causes all code pairs that can be, to be concatenated even if they do not comply with Section 4.1 of the “ISBT 128 Bar Code Symbology and Application Speci-fication for Labeling of Whole Blood and Blood Components” (June 2000, Version 1.2.1).Reading RangeDetermines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The default setting Extended, allows for increased reading distance. Check Digit VerificationThe available options for this parameter are Disabled or French CIP. This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted. Minimum LengthMinimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.3.5 EAN 13EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.ISBN ConversionWhen this parameter (International Standard Book Number) is enabled, the first 3 characters (‘978’) are ignored and the checksum (0.9, ‘X’) is calculated on the remaining characters.Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing 7 characters.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsEAN 8EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-25Transmit Check DigitIf the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.3.6 EAN 8EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.Transmit Check DigitIf the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.Convert To EAN 13If this parameter is enabled, an EAN 8 bar code is converted to EAN 13.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.3.7 UPCAEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “UPC A” bar code scanning recognition.Transmit Check DigitIf the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.Transmit Number SystemIf this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar code data.Convert To EAN 13If this parameter is enabled, a UPC A bar code is converted to EAN 13.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.Preliminary Draft
C-26 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsUPC EC.3.8 UPC EEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “UPC E”.Enable UPC-E1Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.Transmit Check DigitIf the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.Transmit Number SystemIf this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar code data.Convert To UPC-AThis parameter converts UPC E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC A format before transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A pro-gramming selections (e.g. Check Digit).Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.3.9 UPC/EAN Shared The setting assigned to the “Addendum” parameter associated with this option is shared across all UPC and EAN bar codes.AddendumAn addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter provides two options: Not Required but Transmitted if Read or Required and Transmitted. • Double-tap on Addendum to display a dialog box listing your options.• Highlight an item, and tap on OK.When “Addendum” is set to Not Required but Transmitted if Read, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to Required and Transmitted, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCode 93EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-27Addendum Add-on 2 And Addendum Add-on 5Enabling these parameters sets the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or5 characters.Addendum SecurityIf you tap on “Addendum Security”, a dialog box is displayed in which you can define the security level of add-on 2 or add-on 5 with a value from 0 to 100. As security levels in-crease, the scanner decode speed decreases.GTIN CompliantGTIN (global trade item number) processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14-character EAN/UCC GTIN. To use GTIN processing, you must activate the EAN 128 symbology.Reading RangeThis parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance. C.3.10  Code 93EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Code 93”.Minimum LengthMinimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.Important: When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated, it is not possible to read normal EAN 128 Codes.Preliminary Draft
C-28 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCodabarC.3.11  CodabarEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Codabar”.Start/Stop TransmitCodabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters:a, b, c, d A, B, C, D a, b, c, d, /, t, n, *, eDC1, DC2, DC3, DC4 Thus, when a set is chosen, the first and last digits of a Codabar message must be one of those characters and the body of the message should not contain these characters. Setting this parameter to Not Transmitted strips the start and stop characters from this bar code. CLSI Library SystemWhen enabled, spaces are inserted after characters 1, 5, 10 in the 14-character label (used in the USA by libraries using the CLSI system). Check Digit VerificationWhen enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of a symbol to ensure it complies with a specified algorithm – either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or OPCC (Optical Product Code Council).Transmit Check DigitIf the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.Set Length L1, Set Length L2, And Set Length L3Lengths for “Codabar” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.Length ModeYou can choose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsMSI PlesseyEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-29Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.3.12  MSI PlesseyEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “MSI”.Enable PlessySet this parameter to on to enable “Plessy”.Check Digit VerificationThe available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10 Check. This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integ-rity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted. Transmit Check DigitIf the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.Plessy Transmit Check DigitIf the check digit is to be transmitted with the Plessy data, this parameter must be enabled.Minimum LengthMinimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Plessy Minimum LengthMinimum lengths for the Plessy bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.Preliminary Draft
C-30 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCode 11C.3.13  Code 11EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Code 11”.Check Digit VerificationThe available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10 Check.This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted. Transmit Check DigitIf the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.Minimum LengthMinimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.3.14  Interleaved 2 of 5EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.Reading RangeThis parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance. Check Digit VerificationThe available options for this parameter are Disabled, MOD 10 Check and French CIP. “Check Digit Verification” uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted. Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsMatrix 2 of 5EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-31Transmit Check DigitIf the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.Set Length L1, Set Length L2, And Set Length L3Lengths for “Interleaved 2 of 5” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.Length ModeYou can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.3.15  Matrix 2 of 5EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Matrix 2 of 5”.Minimum LengthMinimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing 7 characters.Preliminary Draft
C-32 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsDiscrete 2 of 5C.3.16  Discrete 2 of 5EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.Standard 2 of 5 FormatThis parameter allows you to choose a standard format – either Identic on (6 start/stop bars) or Computer Identics (4 start/stop bars).Check Digit VerificationThe available options for this parameter are Disabled and MOD 10 Check. “Check Digit Verification” uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted. Transmit Check DigitIf the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.Set Length L1, Set Length L2, And Set Length L3Lengths for “Discrete 2 of 5” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.Length ModeYou can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.3.17  TelepenEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Telepen”.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsRSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-33FormatThis parameter allows you to set the bar code character format to either ASCII or Numeric.Minimum LengthMinimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.3.18  RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)EnableSetting this parameter to on enables “RSS Code” scanning capability.Enable RSS-14RSS-14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top of the other half. Stacking the code reduces the bar code length, and providing the nominal height of the code is maintained, it can be omni-directionally scanned.Enable RSS Limited“RSS-Limited” is restricted, in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs (global trade item number) that begin with either a 0 or a 1. It is not stackable and is not designed to be read omni-directionally.Enable RSS Expanded“RSS Expanded” uses the same application identifiers as UCC/EAN-128 codes but they can be split into sections and stacked several rows high, reducing the length of the symbol, while increasing the capacity of data that can be stored. “RSS Expanded” code can be omni-direc-tionally scanned.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Preliminary Draft
C-34 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCompositeAdd/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.3.19  CompositeA composite symbol includes multi-row 2D components making it compatible with linear and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners. The options available for this parameter represent multi-level components of a composite symbol.Enable CC-C And Enable CC-ABTo activate these components, set these parameters to on.Linear Transmission OnlyWhen ‘Linear Transmission Only’ is enabled, only the linear code portion of the composite bar code is transmitted when scanned.UPC-EAN Composite MessageThis option allows you to choose how UPC-EAN shared bar codes are transmitted: Always Linked, Never Linked or Auto-discriminate.C.3.20  TLC-39EnableThis composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear Code 39 symbol. Setting this parameter to on enables this parameter.Linear Transmission OnlyWhen “Linear Transmission Only” is enabled, only the linear portion of the composite bar code is transmitted when scanned.Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled. In addition, “Center Bar Code Only” must be disabled.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsPDF-417EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-35Security LevelThis parameter is used to differentiate between TLC-39 and standard Code 39. Tapping on “Security Level” displays a dialog box in which you can assign a value from 0 to 100. The higher the value assigned, the lower the decode rate.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.3.21  PDF-417EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “PDF-417”.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.3.22  Micro PDF-417EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Micro PDF-417”.Code 128 EmulationWhen this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF-417 symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols. If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, the following Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes:]C1 - if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915]C2 - if the first codeword is 908 or 909]C0 - if the first codeword is 910 or 911If Code 128 Emulation is set to off, the Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes:Preliminary Draft
C-36 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCodablock]L3 - if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915]L4 - if the first codeword is 908 or 909]L5 - if the first codeword is 910 or 911Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.3.23  CodablockEnable Codablock ASet this parameter to on to enable “Codablock type A”.Enable Codablock FSet this parameter to on to enable “Codablock type F”.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsImagerEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-37C.4 Imager• Tap on the Scanner drop down menu, and choose Imager.C.4.1 Options – ImagerCenter Barcode OnlyWhen more than one bar code is visible in a single snap shot, this parameter allows you to specify that only the centre image within the imager framing marker be read. When this parameter is set to on, the target dot is pointed at the centre image and only that image is returned.Max Number BarcodesThis parameter specifies the maximum number of bar codes the imager will attempt to decode in an image. A maximum of 6 bar codes can be decoded at one time.Barcodes Must DecodeThis parameter specifies the minimum number of bar codes that the imager must decode in order to report success. Note: This parameter must be disabled when reading Composite bar codes.Note: This number must be less than the number of bar codes assigned to “Max Number Barcodes”. The driver validates and reassigns the value if necessary.Preliminary Draft
C-38 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsCode 39 SettingsC.4.2 Code 39 SettingsEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Code 39”.Full ASCIIIf this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character.Check Digit VerificationWhen this parameter is enabled (set to on), the integrity of a “Code 39” symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.4.3 Code 128 SettingsEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Code 128”.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.4.4 EAN 13EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsEAN 8EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-39AddendumAn addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Optional and Required. Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored.• Double-tap on Addendum to display a dialog box listing your options.• Highlight an item, and tap on OK.When “Addendum” is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.4.5 EAN 8EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.AddendumRefer to “Addendum” on page C-26.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.4.6 UPC AEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “UPC A”.AddendumRefer to “Addendum” on page C-26.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.Note: Setting “Addendum” to ‘Optional’ reduces performance. It should only be chosen if at least some of the bar codes being read have addendums.Preliminary Draft
C-40 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsUPC EC.4.7 UPC EEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “UPC E”.AddendumRefer to “Addendum” on page C-26.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.4.8 Code 93EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Code 93”.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.4.9  CodabarEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Codabar”.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.4.10  Interleaved 2 of 5EnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsRSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-41Check Digit VerificationWhen enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of an I 2 of 5 symbol to ensure it complies with a specified algorithm – either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or OPCC (Op-tical Product Code Council).Include CheckIf this parameter is enabled, the check digit is transmitted along with the I 2 of 5 symbol.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.4.11  RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)EnableSetting this parameter to on enables “RSS Code” scanning capability.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.4.12  CompositeEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Composite” bar codes.C.4.13  PDF-417EnableSetting this parameter to on enables PDF-417 two dimensional (2D) coding.Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled. Preliminary Draft
C-42 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsMicro PDF-417Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.4.14  Micro PDF-417EnableSetting this parameter to on enables “Micro PDF-417” bar code scanning. Micro PDF-417 is a multi-row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater area efficiency but lower data capacity than PDF-417.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.4.15  2D Data MatrixEnableSet this parameter to on to enable “Data Matrix”.Inverse Video ModeEnabling this parameter allows the imager to read inverse bar codes – white symbols pre-sented on a black background.RectangularEnabling this parameter allows the imager to recognize rectangular (as opposed to square) symbols.Small Physical SizeSet to on by default, this parameter is used to detect small sized or small featured 2D data matrix symbologies. Turning this option off may decrease response time only if there is a great deal of “clutter” (i.e., pictures) in the image. However because these images are nor-mally clean (the labels contain only text and bar codes along with a significant amount of white space), response time is usually not improved by turning this parameter off.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes Settings2D QR CodeEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-43Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page C-8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-9 for details.C.4.16  2D QR CodeEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “2D QR Code”.Field SizeRefer to “Field Size” on page C-9 for details.C.4.17  2D MaxicodeEnabledSet this parameter to on to read “2D Maxicode” images.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.C.4.18  2D AztecEnabledSet this parameter to on to read “Aztec” symbologies.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.Preliminary Draft
C-44 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsPostal: PlaNETC.4.19  Postal: PlaNETEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Postal: PlaNET”.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.C.4.20  Postal: PostNETEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Postal: PostNET”.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.C.4.21  Postal: AustralianEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Australian”.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.C.4.22  Postal: JapaneseEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Japanese”.Preliminary Draft
Appendix C: Bar Codes SettingsPostal: KoreanEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual C-45Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.C.4.23  Postal: KoreanEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Korean”.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.C.4.24  Postal: RoyalEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Royal”.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.C.4.25  Postal: KixEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Kix”.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.Preliminary Draft
C-46 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix C: Bar Codes SettingsPostal: CanadianC.4.26  Postal: CanadianEnabledSet this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Canadian”.Length RestrictionRefer to “Length Restriction” on page 8 for details.Add/Remove DataRefer to “Add/Remove Data” on page 9 for details.Preliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual D-1APPENDIX DTEKLOGIX IMAGERS APPLETThe Teklogix Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete and activate imager settings. The principle uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture images. A Demonstration Application is provided to demonstrates how the imager works. Refer to “PTSI Imager Demo” on page 69 for details.D.1 Required AppletsIn order to configure imaging, the Manage Triggers and Teklogix Scanners applets must be present in the Settings>System tab along with the Teklogix Imagers applet. D.2 Presets There are two methods that can be used to configure an imager using the Teklogix Imagers applet:• Use a predefined preset.• Create a custom preset based on a predefined preset.A preset is a group of exposure and image correction settings. Each preset config-ures the imager for a specific purpose such as bar code decoding or image capture.Presets also allow easier and faster configuration of the imager after power-on or resume from suspend.The predefined presets are generic and satisfy most user requirements. A custom preset can be created for a specific user application, such as: include only speci-fied bar codes, read only a specified number of bar codes or for reading unusual media.Important: It is strongly recommended that a predefined preset is used whenever possible. Each predefined preset contains a coherent group of settings that are known to work together in the intended environment. In almost all situations, at least one of the prede-fined presets results in a satisfactory outcome.Preliminary Draft
D-2 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletPredefined PresetsEvery preset belongs to a preset type. The following preset types are available:• Imaging for photo capture.• Imaging for bar code decoding.• Symbology selection.At any time, only one preset of each type can be designated as the user-selected active preset.D.2.1 Predefined PresetsPredefined presets are built into the imaging software and cannot be changed. The pre-defined presets allow you to use the imager to perform specified tasks without having to understand and set numerous variables. In almost all cases these predefined presets are sufficient.D.2.2 Bar Code Predefined PresetsThese presets encompass the majority of the most popular bar codes and their subtypes. The bar code decoding symbology predefined presets define which bar codes can be decoded. The bar code decoding camera predefined presets determine how the bar code images are captured D.2.2.1  Bar Code Decoding Symbology Predefined PresetsThe following presets select groups of similar bar codes for decoding.Factory DefaultThis preset enables the decoding of frequently used bar codes.My DefaultThis preset is synchronized with the Teklogix Scanners applet and contains all the symbolo-gies selected using the Teklogix Scanner applet. For details on this synchronization see, “Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers Applet” on page D-17.AllThis preset enables the decoding of all bar codes that the imager can decode. For a descrip-tion of these symbologies see “Imager” on page C-37.Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletBar Code Decoding Camera Predefined PresetsEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual D-3LinearThis preset enables the decoding of all the 1D symbologies that the imager can decode. See “Imager” on page C-37 for a description of these symbologies.Linear and PDF417This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D and PDF symbologies that the imager can decode. See “Imager” on page C-37 for a description of these symbologies.MatrixThis preset enables the decoding of all 2 D symbologies that the imager can decode. See “Imager” on page C-37 for a description of these symbologies.PostalThis preset enables the decoding of all the postal symbologies that the imager can decode. See “Imager” on page C-37 for a description of these symbologies.D.2.3 Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined PresetsThe following presets enable successful bar code image capture in almost all conditions.DefaultThis preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting (about 300 Lux).Low lightThis preset is designed for very dark conditions such as inside a warehouse where the lights are kept low, or inside an unlit truck. This preset increases either the exposure time or the gain.Low powerThis preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to conserve the battery power on the EP10.Glossy surfaceThis preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to reduce reflection. This preset is used to read bar codes that are behind glass, or inside the plastic window of an envelope.Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.Preliminary Draft
D-4 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletImage Capture Predefined PresetsD.2.4 Image Capture Predefined PresetsThe following presets enable successful image capture in almost all conditions.DefaultThis preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting (about 300 Lux).MotionThis preset uses a shorter exposure time so as to freeze motion.Low light nearThis preset is designed for dark conditions, it uses a longer exposure time and includes the flash.D.3 Using The Teklogix Imagers AppletD.3.1 Configuring The Image Capture PresetsTo configure the image capture presets, open the dialog box as follows:• Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.• Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and if it’s not already selected, tap on the Imaging tab.Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletSelecting A CameraEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual D-5The following screen is displayed:Figure D.4  Imaging TabThis window lists all the presets, both predefined and custom. Presets are identified as follows:• Predefined presets are marked as read-only.• Custom presets are marked as read and write.• One preset – either predefined or custom – is marked as active.D.3.2 Selecting A CameraIf your EP10 has more than one built-in camera, one camera must be selected for configura-tion. To select a camera:• Tap on the Camera Presets dropdown menu to view the camera options.• Choose a camera – either Front Imager, the imager located at the top of the unit, or Bottom Colour Camera, the camera located at back of the EP10.D.3.3 Setting The Active PresetAn active preset has an A to the right; in Figure D.4 on page D-5, the active preset is Low light near. To set an active preset:• Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.Important: Currently, only the ‘Front Imager’ can be used to read bar codes. The ‘Bottom Colour Camera’ is limited to taking photos.Preliminary Draft
D-6 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletViewing A PresetD.3.4 Viewing A PresetTo view the parameter settings in a preset:• Highlight a preset, and tap on the View button.The associated preset window is displayed.• Tap on the + sign to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.D.3.5 Creating A Custom PresetA new custom preset is created by modifying a preset – either a predefined preset or an ex-isting custom preset. To create a custom preset:• Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletModifying A Custom PresetEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual D-7In this example, the Low light near preset was chosen. A screen like the sample below is displayed.• Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.• Tap on OK to save your changes.The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write.D.3.6 Modifying A Custom PresetThe parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:Preliminary Draft
D-8 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletModifying A Custom Preset• Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the Edit button.• Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.• Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.• For a parameter that can take a range of values:- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the parameter.- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.- Type a value in the field provided.• For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled:Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletRemoving A Custom PresetEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual D-9- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.• Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.D.3.7 Removing A Custom Preset• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.• Tap on Ye s  to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.D.4 Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Camera PresetsTo configure the bar code decoding camera presets:• Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.• Tap on the Barcoding tab.Figure D.5  Bar Code PresetsThis window lists all the presets, both predefined and the custom. Presets are identified as follows:• Predefined presets are marked as read-only. For a description, review “Predefined Pre-sets” on page D-2.• Custom presets are marked as read and write.• One preset – either predefined or custom – is marked as active.Preliminary Draft
D-10 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletSelecting A CameraThe top port of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets. D.4.1 Selecting A CameraIf your EP10 has more than one built-in camera, one camera must be selected for configura-tion. To select a camera:• Tap on the Camera Presets dropdown menu to view the camera options.• Choose a camera – either Front Imager, the imager located at the top of the unit, or Bottom Colour Camera, the camera located at back of the EP10.D.4.2 Setting The Active PresetAn active preset has an A to the right; in Figure D.5 on page page D-9, the active preset is Defaults. To set an active preset:• Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.D.4.3 Viewing A PresetTo view the parameter settings in a preset:• Highlight a preset, and tap on the View button.Note: The top portion of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets.Important: Currently, only the ‘Front Imager’ can be used to read bar codes. The ‘Bottom Colour Camera’ is limited to taking photos.Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletCreating A Custom PresetEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual D-11The associated preset window is displayed.• Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.D.4.4 Creating A Custom PresetA new custom preset is created by modifying a preset – either a predefined preset or an ex-isting custom preset. To create a custom preset:• Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.A screen like the sample following is displayed.• Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.• Tap on OK to save your changes.Preliminary Draft
D-12 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletModifying A Custom PresetThe preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write.D.4.5 Modifying A Custom PresetThe parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:• Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the Edit button.• Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.• Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.• For a parameter that can take a range of values:Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletRemoving A Custom PresetEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual D-13- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the parameter.- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.- Type a value in the field provided.• For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled:- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.• Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.D.4.6 Removing A Custom Preset• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.• Tap on Ye s  to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.D.4.7 Configuring The Bar Code Decoding SymbologiesTo configure the bar code decoding camera presets:• Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.• Tap on the Barcoding tab.Preliminary Draft
D-14 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletSetting The Active PresetFigure D.6  Viewing Bar Code Decoding SymbologiesD.4.8 Setting The Active PresetAn active preset has an A to the right; in Figure D.5 on page page D-9, the active preset is Defaults. To set an active preset:• Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.D.4.9 Viewing A PresetTo view the parameter settings in a preset:• Highlight a preset, and tap on the View button.The associated preset window is displayed.Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletCreating A Custom PresetEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual D-15• Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.D.4.10 Creating A Custom PresetA new custom preset is created by modifying a preset – either a predefined preset or an ex-isting custom preset. To create a custom preset:• Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.A screen like the sample following is displayed.• Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.• Tap on OK to save your changes.The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write.Preliminary Draft
D-16 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletModifying A Custom PresetD.4.11 Modifying A Custom PresetThe parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:• Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the Edit button.• Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.• Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.• For a parameter that can take a range of values:- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the parameter.Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletRemoving A Custom PresetEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual D-17- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.- Type a value in the field provided.• For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled:- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.• Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.D.4.12 Removing A Custom Preset• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.• Tap on Ye s  to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.D.4.13 Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers AppletAll changes made in the Symbologies Presets in the Imagers Applet are also made in the Scanners Applet. The Scanner Applet will reflect the settings of whichever Symbologies Preset is made active in the Imager Applet.Preliminary Draft
D-18 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletFilter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code DataConfiguring Symbologies In The Teklogix Scanners AppletWhen a symbology is enabled or configured using the Teklogix Scanners applet, the changes are also made in the My Default preset. My Default automatically becomes the active bar code symbology preset.None of the other bar code decoding predefined presets is changed.Configuring Symbologies In The My Default PresetWhen My Default is the active presetIn this case, the changes to the symbology configuration are also made in the Teklogix Scan-ners applet.When My Default is not the active presetIn this case, the changes to the symbology configuration are not made in the Teklogix Scan-ners applet.D.4.14 Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code DataTo configure rules for manipulating bar code data:• Tap on Start>Settings>System tab. • Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and then tap on the Filter tab.D.4.14.1 Modifying A Bar Code SettingThe rules for manipulating data from selected bar code symbologies can be modified. To change the settings for a symbology:• Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletFilter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code DataEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual D-19• Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.• For a parameter that can take a range of values:- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the parameter.- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.- Type a value in the field provided.• For a parameter that takes a single character:- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the parameter. The following screen is displayed:• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.Preliminary Draft
D-20 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletTranslation Tab – Configuring RulesD.4.15 Translation Tab – Configuring RulesTranslation rules enable the automatic processing of bar code data. Up to 10 cases can be de-fined, each consisting of up to 10 sequential rules.• Tap on Start>Settings>System tab. • Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and then tap on the Translation tab.For instructions on adding, editing, and removing translation rules, refer to the “Translations Tab” on page 154.D.4.16 Advanced TabD.4.16.1 File Locations For Captured ImagesTo configure the location for saved images, open the dialog box as follows:• Tap on Start>Settings>System tab. • Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon, and then tap on the Advanced tab.To define the location where imager files will be stored:Note: Changes made to the translations configuration using the Teklogix Scanner Con-trol Panel program are synchronized with changes made here. Changes made in either place affect both translation tables.Preliminary Draft
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletAdvanced TabEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual D-21• Tap on the File Location button. • Type the file Name, choose the Folder and file Type.• Choose the Location in which your files will be saved.• When you have completed all the changes, tap on the Save button.D.4.16.2 Configuring TriggersViewing The Trigger ConfigurationThe trigger on the EP10 hand-held is configured using the Manage Triggers applet. The Tek-logix Imagers applet provides a shortcut to the Manage Triggers applet. •In the Advanced tab, tap on the Trigger Control button.Preliminary Draft
D-22 EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualAppendix D: Teklogix Imagers AppletTeklogix Scanners Applet• To view all the triggers and the hardware devices that are configured to use them, tap in the checkbox next to Show all modules.Adding, Editing And Removing TriggersFor instruction about adding, editing and removing triggers, refer to “Manage Triggers” on page 133.D.5 Teklogix Scanners AppletThe bar code symbologies that are to be read by the imager can be enabled using the Tek-logix Scanners applet. Tapping on Start>Settings>System tab followed by the Teklogix Scanners icon displays this applet. Refer to “Imager” on page C-37 for a list of symbologies.Warning: Changes made to the symbology configuration using the Teklogix Scanner applet are synchronized only with the My Defaults bar code symbology preset. For details, refer to “Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers Applet” on page D-17.Preliminary Draft
EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual IINDEXNumbers2DAztec  D-432D Data Matrix  D-422D imager scanner  2492D Maxicode  D-432D QR Code  D-432D Raster Expand Rate  D-52D UPC Half Block Stitching  D-13802.11a/b/g/n radio specifications  259802.11ab/g/n radio  259AAbout, Bluetooth  180About Device icon  120About icon (software version)  119AC adaptorsafety instructions  223Accepted Start Char  D-22accessoriescarrying case  222desktop docking station  225Ethernet cable  231hand strap  219quad docking station  230RV1005 powered vehicle cradle  242vehicle cradle  238Active Connections, Bluetooth  179ActiveSync  59setting up  59AC wall adaptor (PS1050 - G1)  237Addendum  D-26, D-39, D-40Addendum Add-on 2  D-27Addendum Add-on 5  D-27Addendum Security  D-27Add Remove Data (bar code scanning)  D-9Prefix  D-9Strip Leading  D-9Suffix Char  D-9AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System)  131Aim Duration  D-2aiming dot, duration of  D-2alarm, setting  34alarms, setting  124aligning touchscreen  20AllPredefined preset  C-2appending to bar codescharacters  152App Launch icon  95ASCIIFull Ascii  D-22audio indicatorsbeep conditions  22volume adjustment  22Aztec, 2D  D-43BbacklightBattery Power tab  120External Power tab  121intensity  19Intensity tab  121backup profile, creating (Total Recall)  161backup profile, restoring (Total Recall)  164Bad Scan Beep  153Bar codeDecoding symbology predefined presets  C-2bar codeappending to  152Decoded  D-2displaying type of bar code  153Imager  D-37Options tab  152symbologiesCodabar  D-14, D-28, D-40Preliminary Draft
IndexII EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualCode 11  D-30Code 128  D-9, D-38Code 39  D-38Code 93  D-13, D-27, D-40Discrete 2 of 5  D-16, D-32EAN 13  D-10, D-24, D-38EAN 8  D-10, D-25, D-39Interleaved 2 of 5  D-16, D-30, D-40Matrix 2 of 5  D-31MSI Plessey  D-14, D-29UPC A  D-11, D-25, D-39UPC E  D-11, D-26, D-40Translation tab  154bar code readerapplications  267integrated scanner, operation of  249internal or integrated  267Barcodes Must Decode  D-37batteriesa description of  222Battery Details tab  140battery hotkey  34Battery info. tab  139battery power, managing  138Battery Power tab  120battery settings  139charging  13failure to power up  13installing  12pinouts  B-2removing  12run time  23storing  23swap time  13yellow LED, battery failure  13batteryST3006 6-slot battery charger  ??–236battery chargersafety instructions  223battery power, managing  138battery specifications  265Baud  158Baud Rate (modem setup)  183beeperbeep conditions  22volume adjustment  22Bi-Direction Redundancy  D-4Block Recognizer  54Bluetooth  24pairing devices  25Bluetooth devices, pairing  175Bluetooth radioISM band  172Bluetooth setupperipherals  250Bluetooth setup  172About Tab  180Active Connections  179COM port  177GPRS setup  180Mode tab  176Bluetooth specs  260Built-In Devices tab  141Built-in Devices tab  141Buttons icon  98One Shot tab  99Sequence tab  99Up Down Control tab  98Ccalculator  60calendar  40categories, using  42creating & editing entries  40deleting appointments  43reminders, creating  41calibrating touchscreen  20Call Options (modem setup)  184camera, See digital cameracamera, using  75Card Slots (see Built-in Devices)  141Card Slot tab  141case, carrying  222CDMA/1xRTT  197–208Center Bar Code Only (Imager)  D-37certificates  122chargersafety instructions  223chargers  223AC wall adaptor (PS1050 - G1)  237installation  224RV4000 desktop docking station  225troubleshooting (LED)  229RV4004 operator controls  231, 233RV4004 quad docking station  230troubleshooting  233check digit  D-15Preliminary Draft
IndexEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual IIICheck Digit, One  D-15Check Digits (MSI Plessey)  D-15Check Digit Verification  D-8, D-22, D-24, D-29, D-30, D-32Check Digit Verification (Codabar)  D-28Check Digit Verification (Code 39)  D-38Check Digit Verification (I 2 of 5)  D-16, D-41cleaning EP10  26Click Data (scanner double-click)  152Click Time (scanner double-click)  152clock, setting  34, 124CLSI Editing  D-14CLSI Library System  D-28Codabar  D-14, D-28, D-40Codabar  D-14Codablock  D-36Code 11  D-30Code 128  D-38Code 128  D-9, D-23Code 128 Emulation  D-19, D-35Code 32, Convert To  D-7Code 32 Prefix  D-7Code 39  D-6, D-21Code 93  D-13, D-27, D-40Code 93  D-13Code PageDefault Local ASCII  154ISO-8859-1 Latin 1)  154code page (Data Handling)  154communicationActiveSync  59EP10 to PC  228Ethernet connection (quad docking station)  231COM port, Bluetooth  177Composite  D-18, D-34, D-41connecting to a server with  81connection, cancelling (modem)  184Connection Properties (serial modem)  182Connections  169editing settings  193Internet  184managing  193modem setup  185network, selecting  194network cards, setting up  190Proxy Server setup  195VPN, setting up  192connectionsmanaging  192Connections (Internet)  184connectivity hotkey  33connectivity hotkeys (navigation bar)  170Continuous Scan Mode  D-3, D-20Control PanelPredefined presets  C-2Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A  D-12Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A  D-12Convert To Code 32  D-7Convert To EAN 13  D-16, D-25Convert To UPC -A  D-26Copyright information, operating system  119credit card, wait for (modem setup)  184Custom preset  C-1DData Bits  158Data Bits (modem setup)  183data entry modeshandwriting  68typing  68Data Handling (code page)  154Data Matrix, 2D  D-42date, setting  34Decoded  D-2Decoded (internal) scanner parameters  D-2Decoded Intermec (ISCP) parameters  D-20decoded scanner  D-2Decode Performance  D-8, D-10Decode Performance Level  D-8, D-10Decoding symbologyPredefined symbology  C-2DefaultPredefined preset  C-2, C-3, C-4Default identifierPreset group  C-2Default Local ASCII (Code Page)  154Delete Char Set ECIs  D-6Demo Scanner  60desktop docking station (RV4000)  225desktop screen (Today’s Screen)  31Device ID tab  119Preliminary Draft
IndexIV EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualDial-String Commands (modem setup)  184Dial Tone, wait for (modem setup)  184Diff Read Timeout  D-21digitcheck digit  D-15digital cameradescription  251digital camera specifications  257Discrete 2 of 5  D-16, D-32Discrete 2 of 5  D-16displaybacklight, adjusting  19docking port  B-1docking stationRV4000, desktopoperator controls  226RV4004, quadoperator controls  230, 231, 233uploading data using  24docking stations  223desktop docking station  225installation at site  224quad docking station  230Dot Time  D-2double-clickappending characters to a decodedbar code  152scanner trigger  152Double-Click, Manage Triggers menu  134DSSS, 802.11a/b/g/n radio  259EEA11 2D Imager specifications  267EAN 13  D-10, D-24, D-38EAN 8  D-10, D-25, D-39EAN-8 Zero Extend  D-10ECI Decoder  D-6e-mail notification  37Enable Bookland (UPC-EAN)  D-12Enable CC-AB  D-18, D-34Enable CC-C  D-18, D-34Enable Plessy  D-29Enable RSS-14  D-17, D-33Enable RSS Expanded  D-17, D-33Enable RSS Limited  D-17, D-33Enable TLC-39  D-18EP10specifications  255Error Handler (Psion Teklogix)  147Error Reporting  126Ethernet, connecting with docking station  231Ethernet card See Network Card  190Excel Mobile  60External Power tab  121Ffeatures, EP10 hand-held  4Field Size  D-9file, renaming  45File Explorer  44, 69copy  45copying a file  45deleting file  46folders, creating  45renaming file  45files & folders, managing  44find (search)  82flight mode (disabling the WLAN connection)  189FNC1 Conversion  D-23folder, copying  45folder, creating  45folder, deleting  46folder, renaming  45Full Ascii  D-22Full ASCII (decoded scanner)  D-8Full ASCII (Imager)  D-38Function keys  19GGames  59gang charger  ??–236Glossy surfacePredefined preset  C-3Good Scan Beep  153GPRS (bluetooth)  180GPS (external)  127GPS Settings (built-in profiles)  128Group, preset  C-1GS1-128  D-23GS1-128 GS1 US  D-9GS1-128 Identifier  D-23Preliminary Draft
IndexEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual VGSM/GPRS  197–208, B-1–B-17GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio specifications  263GTIN Compliant  D-23, D-27Hhand strap  219hand strap (RV6021), attaching  219hardware, description of  120headsets, pairing (Bluetooth) 25, 175Help  51hotkeys (navigation bar)  170IIdentifierDefault preset group  C-2Imager  D-37imager (2D) scannerscanning2D  249imager options  249Imager Settings  149Include Check (I 2 of 5)  D-41indicatorsLED functions  21scanner message  250softkey bar  47inking settings  110Input Methods  107Block Recognizer  54, 108Input Method tab  108Keyboard Options  109Letter Recognizer  55, 109soft keyboard  52Transcriber  53Transcriber options  110input modeshandwriting  68typing  68integrated scanner option  249Intensity tab (backlight)  121interface, user  255Interleaved 2 of 5  D-16, D-30, D-40Internet connection  184Internet Explorer  82browsing web sites  83Internet Sharing  70Inverse Video Mode  D-42ISBN Conversion  D-24ISBT 128  D-10, D-23ISBT Concat Any Pair  D-24ISBT Concat Transmit  D-23ISM band, Bluetooth radio  172ISO-8859-1 Latin 1 (code page)  154Kkeyboardone shot mode  99options  109Scancode remapping  103sequence  99Unicode Mapping  102keyboard, soft (onscreen)  52keyboard keys  15, 17DEL key, accessing (BKSP)  18Macro keys  19, 101modifier keys, locking & unlocking  17modifiers  16one shot mode  99punctuation, accessing  17Scancode Remapping  103sequence (Buttons)  99shift-state indicator icon  16, 17, 48Unicode Mapping  102LL1, Set Length  D-7L2, Set Length  D-7landscape orientation  21Laser On Time  D-2, D-20LEDdesktop docking station (RV4000)  226functions  21RV4000 desktop dock  226troubleshooting (desktop dock RV4000)  229troubleshooting quad dock RV4004  233Length Mode  D-28, D-31, D-32Length Restriction (bar code scanning)  D-8Field Size  D-9Preliminary Draft
IndexVI EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualMaximum Size  D-9Minimum Size  D-9Letter Recognizer  55Letter Recognizer options (Input Methods tab)  109LinearPredefined preset  C-3Linear and PDFPredefined preset  C-3Linear Decode  D-13Linear Security Level  D-4Linear Transmission only (Decoded Composite)  D-34Linear Transmission only (TLC-39)  D-34Lock Sequence  106Low lightPredefined preset  C-3Low light nearPredefined preset  C-4Low powerPredefined preset  C-3Low Power Timeout  D-3, D-21MMacro keys  19deleting a macro  102executing a macro  102Macros menu, accessing  101recording and saving  101maintenance (of EP10)  26mappingScancode  103Unicode  102MatrixPredefined preset  C-3Matrix 2 of 5  D-31Maximum Size  D-9Max Number Barcodes  D-37MemoryStorage Card tab  138menuspop-up  46using  46messagesScan Indicator  153scanner warning message  153Scan Result  153Messaging  84folders  84Outlook e-mail, synchronizing  84Micro PDF-417  D-19, D-35, D-42microSD, inserting  25Minimum Cancel Time  D-3, D-20Minimum Length  D-22, D-24, D-27, D-29, D-30, D-31, D-33Minimum Size  D-9Mode, Bluetooth  176modem setup  185Baud Rate  183Call Options  184Cancel If Not Connected  184Data Bits  183Dial-String Commands  184Parity  183Port Settings  183Server Settings  188Stop Bits  183TCP_IP Settings  188Wait For Credit Card  184Wait For Dial Tone  184modem using VPN clients  B-7modifier keys  16locking & unlocking  16One Shot Mode  99shift-state indicator icon  16, 48MotionPredefined preset  C-4MSI Plessey  D-14, D-29Nname, assigning to hand-held  119navigation bar  32Battery hotkey  34connectivity hotkey  33Start button  32volume control  33navigation bar hotkeys  170network, selecting  194network cardsettings, changing  192setting up  190New menu, customizing  43Notecreating  71recording a message (audio)  74Preliminary Draft
IndexEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual VIIrenaming  74synchronizing  75text, converting handwriting into  72Notes  71Notification, setting  117NOTIS Editing  D-14OOne Check Digit  D-15One Shot Mode  99One Shot tab (modifier keys)  99onscreen (soft) keyboard  52Options tab (bar codes)  152orientation, screen  21Outlook e-mail, synchronizing (Messaging)  84Owner Information  115ownership information, defining  36Ppairing Bluetooth devices  175Parameter Scanning  D-3, D-21, D-22, D-23, D-24, D-27, D-29, D-30, D-31, D-33Parity  159Parity (modem setup)  183PC, connecting EP10 to  228PDF-417  D-18, D-35, D-41PDF and linearPredefined preset  C-3PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio specifications  263Picturesdeleting  78editing  78opening  77slide show, creating  78Pictures and Videos  75pinouts  B-1, C-1Plessy Transmit Check Digit  D-29Pocket Excelworkbook components  61Pocket Word  67port pinouts  B-1, C-1portrait orientation  21Port Replicator Port A (COM5) 158Baud  158Data Bits  158Parity  159Stop Bits  159Trigger On Sequence  159portsdocking port  B-1internal scanner  267Port Settings (modem setup)  183PostalPredefined preset  C-3PostalKix  D-45PlaNET  D-44PostNET  D-44Royal  D-45Power  138Advanced battery settings  139Battery Details tab  140Battery tab  139Built-In Devices  141Built-in Devices tab  141Card Slot tab  141On Battery Power  139On External Power  139power management specifications  257Power Mode Decoded (Internal) Scanner  D-3Predefined preset  C-1All  C-2Default  C-2, C-3, C-4Glossy surface  C-3Linear  C-3Linear and PDF  C-3Low light  C-3Low light near  C-4Low power  C-3Matrix  C-3Motion  C-4Postal  C-3Predefined presets  C-2Prefix  D-6, D-9PresetCustom  C-1Group  C-1Group default identifier  C-2Predefined  C-1, C-2Preset groupPreliminary Draft
IndexVIII EP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User ManualDefault identifier  C-2profile, creating backup  161profile, restoring backup  164Programs  49, 59minimizing  49opening  49properties, EP10  120protective case  222proxy server, setting up  195Qquad docking station (RV4004)  230Rradio802.11a/b/g /n Direct Sequence SS  259802.11ab/g/n radio specifications  259Bluetooth specs  260Cinterion PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio specifications  263radio specifications  259Raster Expand Rate (2D)  D-5Raster Height (2D)  D-5Reading Range  D-22, D-24, D-27, D-30Rectangular (2D Data Matrix)  D-42Regional Settings  143remappingScancode  103Unicode  102Remote Desktop Mobile  80Remove Programs  144RSS Code  D-17, D-33, D-41RV1005 powered vehicle cradle  242RV4000 desktop docking stationcleaning  228RV4004 quad docking station  230cleaning  232Ethernet  231troubleshooting  233Ssafety instructionsAC adaptor  223battery charger  223scanner  249safety warning, scanner  249Same Read Timeout  D-21Same Read Validate  D-21Scan Angle  D-5Scancode remapping  103Scan Data Format  D-6Scan Indicator  153Scan Log File  153scannerbar code applications  267EA11 2D Imager specifications  267integrated  267safety warnings  249specifications, internal  267two dimensional (2D) imager scanner  249scanner options  249scanning2D Maxicode  D-432D QR Code  D-432D UPC Half Block Stitching  D-13Aim Duration  D-2aiming (target) dot duration  D-2appending characters  152Bad Scan Beep  153bar code settings  150check digit  D-15Check Digits (MSI Plessey)  D-15Check Digit Verification  D-8Check Digit Verification (Code 39)  D-38Check Digit Verification (I 2 of 5)  D-16, D-41Click Data (appending data)  152Click Time  152CLSI Editing  D-14Codabar  D-14Code 128  D-9, D-23Code 128 Emulation  D-19Code 32 Prefix  D-7Code 39  D-6, D-21Code 93  D-13Composite  D-18, D-34Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A  D-12Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A  D-12Convert To Code 32  D-7Convert To EAN 13  D-16Data Handling (code page)  154Decoded (internal)  D-2Preliminary Draft
IndexEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual IXDecoded Intermec (ISCP)  D-20Decode Perf. Level  D-8, D-10Decode Performance  D-8, D-10Delete Char Set ECIs  D-6Discrete 2 of 5  D-16Dot Time  D-2double-click  152EAN-8 Zero Extend  D-10ECI Decoder  D-6Enable Bookland  D-12Enable CC-AB  D-18, D-34Enable CC-C  D-18, D-34Enable RSS-14  D-17Enable RSS Expanded  D-17Enable RSS Limited  D-17Enable TLC-39  D-18Full ASCII  D-8Good Scan Beep  153Imager  D-37Laser On Time  D-2, D-20Linear Decode  D-13Linear Transmission only (Decoded Composite)  D-34Linear Transmission only (TLC-39)  D-34Micro PDF-417  D-19NOTIS Editing  D-14Options tab  152PDF-417  D-18PostalPlaNET  D-44PostNET  D-44Royal  D-45Prefix  D-6RSS Code  D-17safety instructions  249Scan Data Format  D-6Scan Indicator  153Scan Log File  153Scan Result  153Scan Result Time  153Security Level  D-13Security Level (TLC-39)  D-35Set Length L1  D-7Set Length L2  D-7Suffix  D-6Supp. Redundancy  D-12Supplementals  D-12target (aiming) dot duration  D-2TLC-39  D-34Translations tab  154Transmit Check Digit  D-8Transmit Check Digit (I 2 of 5)  D-16Transmit Check Digit (MSI Plessey)  D-15Transmit Code 1D Char  D-5Trioptic Code 39, Enable  D-6UPC-A Check Digit  D-11UPC-A Preamble  D-11UPC-E1 Check Digit  D-11UPC-E1 Preamble  D-11UPC-EAN  D-12UPC-EAN Shared Settings  D-26UPC-E Check Digit  D-11UPC-E Preamble  D-11Scanning Mode (2D)  D-5Scan Result  153Scan Result Time  153screennavigating  31stylus  31touch pen  31scrolling, adjusting speed (Up_Down tab)  98Search (find)  82Security Level  D-13Security Level (TLC-39)  D-35Sequence (Buttons)  99Sequence tab (Buttons)  99serial modem setup See Connection Properties  182Server Settings (modem setup)  188Set Length L1  D-7Set Length L2  D-7Settings  50, 95App Launch  95Buttons  98Personal Tab  95App Launch icon  95Buttons icon  98One Shot tab  99Sequence tab  99Up_Down tab  98task manager, working with  50shift-state indicator, accessing  48shift-state indicator (softkey bar)  48shift-state indicator icon  17SIM card, inserting  25Sled See vehicle cradle.  238Preliminary Draft
IndexXEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manualsoftkey (softkey bar)  47softkey barshift-state indicator  48softkey  47soft keyboard icon  48softkeys  47soft keyboard (onscreen)  52soft keyboard icon (softkey bar)  48softkeys (softkey bar)  47Soft Scan Timeout  153software specifications  256Sound, setting events  117Sound settings  116specifications802.11b/g  259bar code application  257digital camera  257for EP10 hand-held  255physical dimensions  255power management  257scanner, internal  267software platform  256user interface  255wireless communication  256Start/Stop Transmit  D-22, D-28Start button  32Start Menu  43customising  43Stop  183Stop Bits  159Stop Bits (modem setup)  183Storage Card tab  138Strip Leading  D-9Strip Trailing  D-9stylus (touch pen), using  31stylus tether, attaching  220stylus tether (CH6020), attaching  221Suffix  D-6Suffix Char  D-9Supp. Redundancy (Code 128)  D-12Supplementals (UPC-EAN)  D-12SurfaceGlossy  C-3swap time (for battery)  13Ttarget dot, duration of  D-2taskcompleted (marking as)  39creating  37, 38deleting  39editing  38notification  37sorting  39Task Manager  145task manager  50TCP_IP Settings (modem setup)  188Teklogix Error Handling Service  147Teklogix Imagers Settings  149Telepe n  D-32Terminal Services Client 81session, disconnecting (without ending)  81session, ending  81tether for stylus  220tether for stylus (CH6020)  221TextBlock Recognizer  54entering  52Letter Recognizer  55soft keyboard entry  52transcriber, using  53title bar (navigation bar)  32TLC-39  D-34Today’s Screen (desktop screen)  31appearance of  118Items (to appear in screen)  118Total Recall  160backup profile, creating  161backup profile, restoring  164touch pen, using  31touchscreencalibrating  20stylus, using  31touch pen, using  31touchscreen, aligning (calibrating)  20TranscriberInking  110quick settings  110Transcriber, using  53Transcriber (Input Methods tab)  110Translations parameters (bar codes)  154Transmit Check Digit  D-22, D-25, D-26, D-28, D-29, D-30, D-31, D-32Transmit Check Digit (I 2 of 5)  D-16Preliminary Draft
IndexEP10 Hand-Held (Windows Embedded 6.5) User Manual XITransmit Check Digit (MSI Plessey)  D-15Transmit Code 1D Char  D-5Transmit Number System  D-25, D-26trigger mappings  134Trigger On Sequence  159Trigger Press Type, Manage Triggers menu  136Trioptic Code 39, Enable  D-6troubleshootingRV40004  233RV4000 LED  229TweakIT  164UUnicode Mapping  102Up_Down tab (scrolling adjustments)  98UPC A  D-11, D-25, D-39UPC-A Check Digit  D-11UPC-A Preamble  D-11UPC E  D-11, D-26, D-40UPC-E1 Check Digit  D-11UPC-E1 Preamble  D-11UPC-EAN  D-12UPC-EAN Shared Settings  D-26UPC-E Check Digit  D-11UPC-E Preamble  D-11UPC Half Block Stitching, 2D  D-13Use Virtual Serial Port  B-7Vvehicle cradlepowered, installing cables  245powered 10-55 VDC  238powered 12 VDC  238RV1005 powered  242unpowered  238Version tab  119video recorder, using  79Videos and Pictures  75volume control  33VPN connection, setting up  192Wwall adaptor, AC (PS1050 - G1)  237warnings  153Windows Mobile 6.5, navigating in  31wireless communication specifications  256Wireless WAN  197–208, B-1–B-17Use Virtual Serial Port  B-7Voice  B-16WLAN connections, disabling  189Word Completion tab  112Word Mobiledata entry modes  68Word See Pocket Word  67Preliminary Draft
Preliminary Draft

Navigation menu